ld.texinfo: Clarify that sysroot affects "=" expansion.
[binutils-gdb.git] / ld / ld.texinfo
1 \input texinfo
2 @setfilename ld.info
3 @c Copyright (C) 1991-2014 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
4 @syncodeindex ky cp
5 @c man begin INCLUDE
6 @include configdoc.texi
7 @c (configdoc.texi is generated by the Makefile)
8 @include bfdver.texi
9 @c man end
10
11 @c @smallbook
12
13 @macro gcctabopt{body}
14 @code{\body\}
15 @end macro
16
17 @c man begin NAME
18 @ifset man
19 @c Configure for the generation of man pages
20 @set UsesEnvVars
21 @set GENERIC
22 @set ARM
23 @set C6X
24 @set H8300
25 @set HPPA
26 @set I960
27 @set M68HC11
28 @set M68K
29 @set MIPS
30 @set MMIX
31 @set MSP430
32 @set NDS32
33 @set NIOSII
34 @set POWERPC
35 @set POWERPC64
36 @set Renesas
37 @set SPU
38 @set TICOFF
39 @set WIN32
40 @set XTENSA
41 @end ifset
42 @c man end
43
44 @ifnottex
45 @dircategory Software development
46 @direntry
47 * Ld: (ld). The GNU linker.
48 @end direntry
49 @end ifnottex
50
51 @copying
52 This file documents the @sc{gnu} linker LD
53 @ifset VERSION_PACKAGE
54 @value{VERSION_PACKAGE}
55 @end ifset
56 version @value{VERSION}.
57
58 Copyright @copyright{} 1991-2014 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
59
60 Permission is granted to copy, distribute and/or modify this document
61 under the terms of the GNU Free Documentation License, Version 1.3
62 or any later version published by the Free Software Foundation;
63 with no Invariant Sections, with no Front-Cover Texts, and with no
64 Back-Cover Texts. A copy of the license is included in the
65 section entitled ``GNU Free Documentation License''.
66 @end copying
67 @iftex
68 @finalout
69 @setchapternewpage odd
70 @settitle The GNU linker
71 @titlepage
72 @title The GNU linker
73 @sp 1
74 @subtitle @code{ld}
75 @ifset VERSION_PACKAGE
76 @subtitle @value{VERSION_PACKAGE}
77 @end ifset
78 @subtitle Version @value{VERSION}
79 @author Steve Chamberlain
80 @author Ian Lance Taylor
81 @page
82
83 @tex
84 {\parskip=0pt
85 \hfill Red Hat Inc\par
86 \hfill nickc\@credhat.com, doc\@redhat.com\par
87 \hfill {\it The GNU linker}\par
88 \hfill Edited by Jeffrey Osier (jeffrey\@cygnus.com)\par
89 }
90 \global\parindent=0pt % Steve likes it this way.
91 @end tex
92
93 @vskip 0pt plus 1filll
94 @c man begin COPYRIGHT
95 Copyright @copyright{} 1991-2014 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
96
97 Permission is granted to copy, distribute and/or modify this document
98 under the terms of the GNU Free Documentation License, Version 1.3
99 or any later version published by the Free Software Foundation;
100 with no Invariant Sections, with no Front-Cover Texts, and with no
101 Back-Cover Texts. A copy of the license is included in the
102 section entitled ``GNU Free Documentation License''.
103 @c man end
104
105 @end titlepage
106 @end iftex
107 @contents
108 @c FIXME: Talk about importance of *order* of args, cmds to linker!
109
110 @ifnottex
111 @node Top
112 @top LD
113 This file documents the @sc{gnu} linker ld
114 @ifset VERSION_PACKAGE
115 @value{VERSION_PACKAGE}
116 @end ifset
117 version @value{VERSION}.
118
119 This document is distributed under the terms of the GNU Free
120 Documentation License version 1.3. A copy of the license is included
121 in the section entitled ``GNU Free Documentation License''.
122
123 @menu
124 * Overview:: Overview
125 * Invocation:: Invocation
126 * Scripts:: Linker Scripts
127 @ifset GENERIC
128 * Machine Dependent:: Machine Dependent Features
129 @end ifset
130 @ifclear GENERIC
131 @ifset H8300
132 * H8/300:: ld and the H8/300
133 @end ifset
134 @ifset Renesas
135 * Renesas:: ld and other Renesas micros
136 @end ifset
137 @ifset I960
138 * i960:: ld and the Intel 960 family
139 @end ifset
140 @ifset ARM
141 * ARM:: ld and the ARM family
142 @end ifset
143 @ifset M68HC11
144 * M68HC11/68HC12:: ld and the Motorola 68HC11 and 68HC12 families
145 @end ifset
146 @ifset HPPA
147 * HPPA ELF32:: ld and HPPA 32-bit ELF
148 @end ifset
149 @ifset M68K
150 * M68K:: ld and Motorola 68K family
151 @end ifset
152 @ifset MIPS
153 * MIPS:: ld and MIPS family
154 @end ifset
155 @ifset POWERPC
156 * PowerPC ELF32:: ld and PowerPC 32-bit ELF Support
157 @end ifset
158 @ifset POWERPC64
159 * PowerPC64 ELF64:: ld and PowerPC64 64-bit ELF Support
160 @end ifset
161 @ifset SPU
162 * SPU ELF:: ld and SPU ELF Support
163 @end ifset
164 @ifset TICOFF
165 * TI COFF:: ld and the TI COFF
166 @end ifset
167 @ifset WIN32
168 * Win32:: ld and WIN32 (cygwin/mingw)
169 @end ifset
170 @ifset XTENSA
171 * Xtensa:: ld and Xtensa Processors
172 @end ifset
173 @end ifclear
174 @ifclear SingleFormat
175 * BFD:: BFD
176 @end ifclear
177 @c Following blank line required for remaining bug in makeinfo conds/menus
178
179 * Reporting Bugs:: Reporting Bugs
180 * MRI:: MRI Compatible Script Files
181 * GNU Free Documentation License:: GNU Free Documentation License
182 * LD Index:: LD Index
183 @end menu
184 @end ifnottex
185
186 @node Overview
187 @chapter Overview
188
189 @cindex @sc{gnu} linker
190 @cindex what is this?
191
192 @ifset man
193 @c man begin SYNOPSIS
194 ld [@b{options}] @var{objfile} @dots{}
195 @c man end
196
197 @c man begin SEEALSO
198 ar(1), nm(1), objcopy(1), objdump(1), readelf(1) and
199 the Info entries for @file{binutils} and
200 @file{ld}.
201 @c man end
202 @end ifset
203
204 @c man begin DESCRIPTION
205
206 @command{ld} combines a number of object and archive files, relocates
207 their data and ties up symbol references. Usually the last step in
208 compiling a program is to run @command{ld}.
209
210 @command{ld} accepts Linker Command Language files written in
211 a superset of AT&T's Link Editor Command Language syntax,
212 to provide explicit and total control over the linking process.
213
214 @ifset man
215 @c For the man only
216 This man page does not describe the command language; see the
217 @command{ld} entry in @code{info} for full details on the command
218 language and on other aspects of the GNU linker.
219 @end ifset
220
221 @ifclear SingleFormat
222 This version of @command{ld} uses the general purpose BFD libraries
223 to operate on object files. This allows @command{ld} to read, combine, and
224 write object files in many different formats---for example, COFF or
225 @code{a.out}. Different formats may be linked together to produce any
226 available kind of object file. @xref{BFD}, for more information.
227 @end ifclear
228
229 Aside from its flexibility, the @sc{gnu} linker is more helpful than other
230 linkers in providing diagnostic information. Many linkers abandon
231 execution immediately upon encountering an error; whenever possible,
232 @command{ld} continues executing, allowing you to identify other errors
233 (or, in some cases, to get an output file in spite of the error).
234
235 @c man end
236
237 @node Invocation
238 @chapter Invocation
239
240 @c man begin DESCRIPTION
241
242 The @sc{gnu} linker @command{ld} is meant to cover a broad range of situations,
243 and to be as compatible as possible with other linkers. As a result,
244 you have many choices to control its behavior.
245
246 @c man end
247
248 @ifset UsesEnvVars
249 @menu
250 * Options:: Command Line Options
251 * Environment:: Environment Variables
252 @end menu
253
254 @node Options
255 @section Command Line Options
256 @end ifset
257
258 @cindex command line
259 @cindex options
260
261 @c man begin OPTIONS
262
263 The linker supports a plethora of command-line options, but in actual
264 practice few of them are used in any particular context.
265 @cindex standard Unix system
266 For instance, a frequent use of @command{ld} is to link standard Unix
267 object files on a standard, supported Unix system. On such a system, to
268 link a file @code{hello.o}:
269
270 @smallexample
271 ld -o @var{output} /lib/crt0.o hello.o -lc
272 @end smallexample
273
274 This tells @command{ld} to produce a file called @var{output} as the
275 result of linking the file @code{/lib/crt0.o} with @code{hello.o} and
276 the library @code{libc.a}, which will come from the standard search
277 directories. (See the discussion of the @samp{-l} option below.)
278
279 Some of the command-line options to @command{ld} may be specified at any
280 point in the command line. However, options which refer to files, such
281 as @samp{-l} or @samp{-T}, cause the file to be read at the point at
282 which the option appears in the command line, relative to the object
283 files and other file options. Repeating non-file options with a
284 different argument will either have no further effect, or override prior
285 occurrences (those further to the left on the command line) of that
286 option. Options which may be meaningfully specified more than once are
287 noted in the descriptions below.
288
289 @cindex object files
290 Non-option arguments are object files or archives which are to be linked
291 together. They may follow, precede, or be mixed in with command-line
292 options, except that an object file argument may not be placed between
293 an option and its argument.
294
295 Usually the linker is invoked with at least one object file, but you can
296 specify other forms of binary input files using @samp{-l}, @samp{-R},
297 and the script command language. If @emph{no} binary input files at all
298 are specified, the linker does not produce any output, and issues the
299 message @samp{No input files}.
300
301 If the linker cannot recognize the format of an object file, it will
302 assume that it is a linker script. A script specified in this way
303 augments the main linker script used for the link (either the default
304 linker script or the one specified by using @samp{-T}). This feature
305 permits the linker to link against a file which appears to be an object
306 or an archive, but actually merely defines some symbol values, or uses
307 @code{INPUT} or @code{GROUP} to load other objects. Specifying a
308 script in this way merely augments the main linker script, with the
309 extra commands placed after the main script; use the @samp{-T} option
310 to replace the default linker script entirely, but note the effect of
311 the @code{INSERT} command. @xref{Scripts}.
312
313 For options whose names are a single letter,
314 option arguments must either follow the option letter without intervening
315 whitespace, or be given as separate arguments immediately following the
316 option that requires them.
317
318 For options whose names are multiple letters, either one dash or two can
319 precede the option name; for example, @samp{-trace-symbol} and
320 @samp{--trace-symbol} are equivalent. Note---there is one exception to
321 this rule. Multiple letter options that start with a lower case 'o' can
322 only be preceded by two dashes. This is to reduce confusion with the
323 @samp{-o} option. So for example @samp{-omagic} sets the output file
324 name to @samp{magic} whereas @samp{--omagic} sets the NMAGIC flag on the
325 output.
326
327 Arguments to multiple-letter options must either be separated from the
328 option name by an equals sign, or be given as separate arguments
329 immediately following the option that requires them. For example,
330 @samp{--trace-symbol foo} and @samp{--trace-symbol=foo} are equivalent.
331 Unique abbreviations of the names of multiple-letter options are
332 accepted.
333
334 Note---if the linker is being invoked indirectly, via a compiler driver
335 (e.g. @samp{gcc}) then all the linker command line options should be
336 prefixed by @samp{-Wl,} (or whatever is appropriate for the particular
337 compiler driver) like this:
338
339 @smallexample
340 gcc -Wl,--start-group foo.o bar.o -Wl,--end-group
341 @end smallexample
342
343 This is important, because otherwise the compiler driver program may
344 silently drop the linker options, resulting in a bad link. Confusion
345 may also arise when passing options that require values through a
346 driver, as the use of a space between option and argument acts as
347 a separator, and causes the driver to pass only the option to the linker
348 and the argument to the compiler. In this case, it is simplest to use
349 the joined forms of both single- and multiple-letter options, such as:
350
351 @smallexample
352 gcc foo.o bar.o -Wl,-eENTRY -Wl,-Map=a.map
353 @end smallexample
354
355 Here is a table of the generic command line switches accepted by the GNU
356 linker:
357
358 @table @gcctabopt
359 @include at-file.texi
360
361 @kindex -a @var{keyword}
362 @item -a @var{keyword}
363 This option is supported for HP/UX compatibility. The @var{keyword}
364 argument must be one of the strings @samp{archive}, @samp{shared}, or
365 @samp{default}. @samp{-aarchive} is functionally equivalent to
366 @samp{-Bstatic}, and the other two keywords are functionally equivalent
367 to @samp{-Bdynamic}. This option may be used any number of times.
368
369 @kindex --audit @var{AUDITLIB}
370 @item --audit @var{AUDITLIB}
371 Adds @var{AUDITLIB} to the @code{DT_AUDIT} entry of the dynamic section.
372 @var{AUDITLIB} is not checked for existence, nor will it use the DT_SONAME
373 specified in the library. If specified multiple times @code{DT_AUDIT}
374 will contain a colon separated list of audit interfaces to use. If the linker
375 finds an object with an audit entry while searching for shared libraries,
376 it will add a corresponding @code{DT_DEPAUDIT} entry in the output file.
377 This option is only meaningful on ELF platforms supporting the rtld-audit
378 interface.
379
380 @ifset I960
381 @cindex architectures
382 @kindex -A @var{arch}
383 @item -A @var{architecture}
384 @kindex --architecture=@var{arch}
385 @itemx --architecture=@var{architecture}
386 In the current release of @command{ld}, this option is useful only for the
387 Intel 960 family of architectures. In that @command{ld} configuration, the
388 @var{architecture} argument identifies the particular architecture in
389 the 960 family, enabling some safeguards and modifying the
390 archive-library search path. @xref{i960,,@command{ld} and the Intel 960
391 family}, for details.
392
393 Future releases of @command{ld} may support similar functionality for
394 other architecture families.
395 @end ifset
396
397 @ifclear SingleFormat
398 @cindex binary input format
399 @kindex -b @var{format}
400 @kindex --format=@var{format}
401 @cindex input format
402 @cindex input format
403 @item -b @var{input-format}
404 @itemx --format=@var{input-format}
405 @command{ld} may be configured to support more than one kind of object
406 file. If your @command{ld} is configured this way, you can use the
407 @samp{-b} option to specify the binary format for input object files
408 that follow this option on the command line. Even when @command{ld} is
409 configured to support alternative object formats, you don't usually need
410 to specify this, as @command{ld} should be configured to expect as a
411 default input format the most usual format on each machine.
412 @var{input-format} is a text string, the name of a particular format
413 supported by the BFD libraries. (You can list the available binary
414 formats with @samp{objdump -i}.)
415 @xref{BFD}.
416
417 You may want to use this option if you are linking files with an unusual
418 binary format. You can also use @samp{-b} to switch formats explicitly (when
419 linking object files of different formats), by including
420 @samp{-b @var{input-format}} before each group of object files in a
421 particular format.
422
423 The default format is taken from the environment variable
424 @code{GNUTARGET}.
425 @ifset UsesEnvVars
426 @xref{Environment}.
427 @end ifset
428 You can also define the input format from a script, using the command
429 @code{TARGET};
430 @ifclear man
431 see @ref{Format Commands}.
432 @end ifclear
433 @end ifclear
434
435 @kindex -c @var{MRI-cmdfile}
436 @kindex --mri-script=@var{MRI-cmdfile}
437 @cindex compatibility, MRI
438 @item -c @var{MRI-commandfile}
439 @itemx --mri-script=@var{MRI-commandfile}
440 For compatibility with linkers produced by MRI, @command{ld} accepts script
441 files written in an alternate, restricted command language, described in
442 @ifclear man
443 @ref{MRI,,MRI Compatible Script Files}.
444 @end ifclear
445 @ifset man
446 the MRI Compatible Script Files section of GNU ld documentation.
447 @end ifset
448 Introduce MRI script files with
449 the option @samp{-c}; use the @samp{-T} option to run linker
450 scripts written in the general-purpose @command{ld} scripting language.
451 If @var{MRI-cmdfile} does not exist, @command{ld} looks for it in the directories
452 specified by any @samp{-L} options.
453
454 @cindex common allocation
455 @kindex -d
456 @kindex -dc
457 @kindex -dp
458 @item -d
459 @itemx -dc
460 @itemx -dp
461 These three options are equivalent; multiple forms are supported for
462 compatibility with other linkers. They assign space to common symbols
463 even if a relocatable output file is specified (with @samp{-r}). The
464 script command @code{FORCE_COMMON_ALLOCATION} has the same effect.
465 @xref{Miscellaneous Commands}.
466
467 @kindex --depaudit @var{AUDITLIB}
468 @kindex -P @var{AUDITLIB}
469 @item --depaudit @var{AUDITLIB}
470 @itemx -P @var{AUDITLIB}
471 Adds @var{AUDITLIB} to the @code{DT_DEPAUDIT} entry of the dynamic section.
472 @var{AUDITLIB} is not checked for existence, nor will it use the DT_SONAME
473 specified in the library. If specified multiple times @code{DT_DEPAUDIT}
474 will contain a colon separated list of audit interfaces to use. This
475 option is only meaningful on ELF platforms supporting the rtld-audit interface.
476 The -P option is provided for Solaris compatibility.
477
478 @cindex entry point, from command line
479 @kindex -e @var{entry}
480 @kindex --entry=@var{entry}
481 @item -e @var{entry}
482 @itemx --entry=@var{entry}
483 Use @var{entry} as the explicit symbol for beginning execution of your
484 program, rather than the default entry point. If there is no symbol
485 named @var{entry}, the linker will try to parse @var{entry} as a number,
486 and use that as the entry address (the number will be interpreted in
487 base 10; you may use a leading @samp{0x} for base 16, or a leading
488 @samp{0} for base 8). @xref{Entry Point}, for a discussion of defaults
489 and other ways of specifying the entry point.
490
491 @kindex --exclude-libs
492 @item --exclude-libs @var{lib},@var{lib},...
493 Specifies a list of archive libraries from which symbols should not be automatically
494 exported. The library names may be delimited by commas or colons. Specifying
495 @code{--exclude-libs ALL} excludes symbols in all archive libraries from
496 automatic export. This option is available only for the i386 PE targeted
497 port of the linker and for ELF targeted ports. For i386 PE, symbols
498 explicitly listed in a .def file are still exported, regardless of this
499 option. For ELF targeted ports, symbols affected by this option will
500 be treated as hidden.
501
502 @kindex --exclude-modules-for-implib
503 @item --exclude-modules-for-implib @var{module},@var{module},...
504 Specifies a list of object files or archive members, from which symbols
505 should not be automatically exported, but which should be copied wholesale
506 into the import library being generated during the link. The module names
507 may be delimited by commas or colons, and must match exactly the filenames
508 used by @command{ld} to open the files; for archive members, this is simply
509 the member name, but for object files the name listed must include and
510 match precisely any path used to specify the input file on the linker's
511 command-line. This option is available only for the i386 PE targeted port
512 of the linker. Symbols explicitly listed in a .def file are still exported,
513 regardless of this option.
514
515 @cindex dynamic symbol table
516 @kindex -E
517 @kindex --export-dynamic
518 @kindex --no-export-dynamic
519 @item -E
520 @itemx --export-dynamic
521 @itemx --no-export-dynamic
522 When creating a dynamically linked executable, using the @option{-E}
523 option or the @option{--export-dynamic} option causes the linker to add
524 all symbols to the dynamic symbol table. The dynamic symbol table is the
525 set of symbols which are visible from dynamic objects at run time.
526
527 If you do not use either of these options (or use the
528 @option{--no-export-dynamic} option to restore the default behavior), the
529 dynamic symbol table will normally contain only those symbols which are
530 referenced by some dynamic object mentioned in the link.
531
532 If you use @code{dlopen} to load a dynamic object which needs to refer
533 back to the symbols defined by the program, rather than some other
534 dynamic object, then you will probably need to use this option when
535 linking the program itself.
536
537 You can also use the dynamic list to control what symbols should
538 be added to the dynamic symbol table if the output format supports it.
539 See the description of @samp{--dynamic-list}.
540
541 Note that this option is specific to ELF targeted ports. PE targets
542 support a similar function to export all symbols from a DLL or EXE; see
543 the description of @samp{--export-all-symbols} below.
544
545 @ifclear SingleFormat
546 @cindex big-endian objects
547 @cindex endianness
548 @kindex -EB
549 @item -EB
550 Link big-endian objects. This affects the default output format.
551
552 @cindex little-endian objects
553 @kindex -EL
554 @item -EL
555 Link little-endian objects. This affects the default output format.
556 @end ifclear
557
558 @kindex -f @var{name}
559 @kindex --auxiliary=@var{name}
560 @item -f @var{name}
561 @itemx --auxiliary=@var{name}
562 When creating an ELF shared object, set the internal DT_AUXILIARY field
563 to the specified name. This tells the dynamic linker that the symbol
564 table of the shared object should be used as an auxiliary filter on the
565 symbol table of the shared object @var{name}.
566
567 If you later link a program against this filter object, then, when you
568 run the program, the dynamic linker will see the DT_AUXILIARY field. If
569 the dynamic linker resolves any symbols from the filter object, it will
570 first check whether there is a definition in the shared object
571 @var{name}. If there is one, it will be used instead of the definition
572 in the filter object. The shared object @var{name} need not exist.
573 Thus the shared object @var{name} may be used to provide an alternative
574 implementation of certain functions, perhaps for debugging or for
575 machine specific performance.
576
577 This option may be specified more than once. The DT_AUXILIARY entries
578 will be created in the order in which they appear on the command line.
579
580 @kindex -F @var{name}
581 @kindex --filter=@var{name}
582 @item -F @var{name}
583 @itemx --filter=@var{name}
584 When creating an ELF shared object, set the internal DT_FILTER field to
585 the specified name. This tells the dynamic linker that the symbol table
586 of the shared object which is being created should be used as a filter
587 on the symbol table of the shared object @var{name}.
588
589 If you later link a program against this filter object, then, when you
590 run the program, the dynamic linker will see the DT_FILTER field. The
591 dynamic linker will resolve symbols according to the symbol table of the
592 filter object as usual, but it will actually link to the definitions
593 found in the shared object @var{name}. Thus the filter object can be
594 used to select a subset of the symbols provided by the object
595 @var{name}.
596
597 Some older linkers used the @option{-F} option throughout a compilation
598 toolchain for specifying object-file format for both input and output
599 object files.
600 @ifclear SingleFormat
601 The @sc{gnu} linker uses other mechanisms for this purpose: the
602 @option{-b}, @option{--format}, @option{--oformat} options, the
603 @code{TARGET} command in linker scripts, and the @code{GNUTARGET}
604 environment variable.
605 @end ifclear
606 The @sc{gnu} linker will ignore the @option{-F} option when not
607 creating an ELF shared object.
608
609 @cindex finalization function
610 @kindex -fini=@var{name}
611 @item -fini=@var{name}
612 When creating an ELF executable or shared object, call NAME when the
613 executable or shared object is unloaded, by setting DT_FINI to the
614 address of the function. By default, the linker uses @code{_fini} as
615 the function to call.
616
617 @kindex -g
618 @item -g
619 Ignored. Provided for compatibility with other tools.
620
621 @kindex -G @var{value}
622 @kindex --gpsize=@var{value}
623 @cindex object size
624 @item -G @var{value}
625 @itemx --gpsize=@var{value}
626 Set the maximum size of objects to be optimized using the GP register to
627 @var{size}. This is only meaningful for object file formats such as
628 MIPS ELF that support putting large and small objects into different
629 sections. This is ignored for other object file formats.
630
631 @cindex runtime library name
632 @kindex -h @var{name}
633 @kindex -soname=@var{name}
634 @item -h @var{name}
635 @itemx -soname=@var{name}
636 When creating an ELF shared object, set the internal DT_SONAME field to
637 the specified name. When an executable is linked with a shared object
638 which has a DT_SONAME field, then when the executable is run the dynamic
639 linker will attempt to load the shared object specified by the DT_SONAME
640 field rather than the using the file name given to the linker.
641
642 @kindex -i
643 @cindex incremental link
644 @item -i
645 Perform an incremental link (same as option @samp{-r}).
646
647 @cindex initialization function
648 @kindex -init=@var{name}
649 @item -init=@var{name}
650 When creating an ELF executable or shared object, call NAME when the
651 executable or shared object is loaded, by setting DT_INIT to the address
652 of the function. By default, the linker uses @code{_init} as the
653 function to call.
654
655 @cindex archive files, from cmd line
656 @kindex -l @var{namespec}
657 @kindex --library=@var{namespec}
658 @item -l @var{namespec}
659 @itemx --library=@var{namespec}
660 Add the archive or object file specified by @var{namespec} to the
661 list of files to link. This option may be used any number of times.
662 If @var{namespec} is of the form @file{:@var{filename}}, @command{ld}
663 will search the library path for a file called @var{filename}, otherwise it
664 will search the library path for a file called @file{lib@var{namespec}.a}.
665
666 On systems which support shared libraries, @command{ld} may also search for
667 files other than @file{lib@var{namespec}.a}. Specifically, on ELF
668 and SunOS systems, @command{ld} will search a directory for a library
669 called @file{lib@var{namespec}.so} before searching for one called
670 @file{lib@var{namespec}.a}. (By convention, a @code{.so} extension
671 indicates a shared library.) Note that this behavior does not apply
672 to @file{:@var{filename}}, which always specifies a file called
673 @var{filename}.
674
675 The linker will search an archive only once, at the location where it is
676 specified on the command line. If the archive defines a symbol which
677 was undefined in some object which appeared before the archive on the
678 command line, the linker will include the appropriate file(s) from the
679 archive. However, an undefined symbol in an object appearing later on
680 the command line will not cause the linker to search the archive again.
681
682 See the @option{-(} option for a way to force the linker to search
683 archives multiple times.
684
685 You may list the same archive multiple times on the command line.
686
687 @ifset GENERIC
688 This type of archive searching is standard for Unix linkers. However,
689 if you are using @command{ld} on AIX, note that it is different from the
690 behaviour of the AIX linker.
691 @end ifset
692
693 @cindex search directory, from cmd line
694 @kindex -L @var{dir}
695 @kindex --library-path=@var{dir}
696 @item -L @var{searchdir}
697 @itemx --library-path=@var{searchdir}
698 Add path @var{searchdir} to the list of paths that @command{ld} will search
699 for archive libraries and @command{ld} control scripts. You may use this
700 option any number of times. The directories are searched in the order
701 in which they are specified on the command line. Directories specified
702 on the command line are searched before the default directories. All
703 @option{-L} options apply to all @option{-l} options, regardless of the
704 order in which the options appear. @option{-L} options do not affect
705 how @command{ld} searches for a linker script unless @option{-T}
706 option is specified.
707
708 If @var{searchdir} begins with @code{=}, then the @code{=} will be replaced
709 by the @dfn{sysroot prefix}, controlled by the @samp{--sysroot} option, or
710 specified when the linker is configured.
711
712 @ifset UsesEnvVars
713 The default set of paths searched (without being specified with
714 @samp{-L}) depends on which emulation mode @command{ld} is using, and in
715 some cases also on how it was configured. @xref{Environment}.
716 @end ifset
717
718 The paths can also be specified in a link script with the
719 @code{SEARCH_DIR} command. Directories specified this way are searched
720 at the point in which the linker script appears in the command line.
721
722 @cindex emulation
723 @kindex -m @var{emulation}
724 @item -m @var{emulation}
725 Emulate the @var{emulation} linker. You can list the available
726 emulations with the @samp{--verbose} or @samp{-V} options.
727
728 If the @samp{-m} option is not used, the emulation is taken from the
729 @code{LDEMULATION} environment variable, if that is defined.
730
731 Otherwise, the default emulation depends upon how the linker was
732 configured.
733
734 @cindex link map
735 @kindex -M
736 @kindex --print-map
737 @item -M
738 @itemx --print-map
739 Print a link map to the standard output. A link map provides
740 information about the link, including the following:
741
742 @itemize @bullet
743 @item
744 Where object files are mapped into memory.
745 @item
746 How common symbols are allocated.
747 @item
748 All archive members included in the link, with a mention of the symbol
749 which caused the archive member to be brought in.
750 @item
751 The values assigned to symbols.
752
753 Note - symbols whose values are computed by an expression which
754 involves a reference to a previous value of the same symbol may not
755 have correct result displayed in the link map. This is because the
756 linker discards intermediate results and only retains the final value
757 of an expression. Under such circumstances the linker will display
758 the final value enclosed by square brackets. Thus for example a
759 linker script containing:
760
761 @smallexample
762 foo = 1
763 foo = foo * 4
764 foo = foo + 8
765 @end smallexample
766
767 will produce the following output in the link map if the @option{-M}
768 option is used:
769
770 @smallexample
771 0x00000001 foo = 0x1
772 [0x0000000c] foo = (foo * 0x4)
773 [0x0000000c] foo = (foo + 0x8)
774 @end smallexample
775
776 See @ref{Expressions} for more information about expressions in linker
777 scripts.
778 @end itemize
779
780 @kindex -n
781 @cindex read-only text
782 @cindex NMAGIC
783 @kindex --nmagic
784 @item -n
785 @itemx --nmagic
786 Turn off page alignment of sections, and disable linking against shared
787 libraries. If the output format supports Unix style magic numbers,
788 mark the output as @code{NMAGIC}.
789
790 @kindex -N
791 @kindex --omagic
792 @cindex read/write from cmd line
793 @cindex OMAGIC
794 @item -N
795 @itemx --omagic
796 Set the text and data sections to be readable and writable. Also, do
797 not page-align the data segment, and disable linking against shared
798 libraries. If the output format supports Unix style magic numbers,
799 mark the output as @code{OMAGIC}. Note: Although a writable text section
800 is allowed for PE-COFF targets, it does not conform to the format
801 specification published by Microsoft.
802
803 @kindex --no-omagic
804 @cindex OMAGIC
805 @item --no-omagic
806 This option negates most of the effects of the @option{-N} option. It
807 sets the text section to be read-only, and forces the data segment to
808 be page-aligned. Note - this option does not enable linking against
809 shared libraries. Use @option{-Bdynamic} for this.
810
811 @kindex -o @var{output}
812 @kindex --output=@var{output}
813 @cindex naming the output file
814 @item -o @var{output}
815 @itemx --output=@var{output}
816 Use @var{output} as the name for the program produced by @command{ld}; if this
817 option is not specified, the name @file{a.out} is used by default. The
818 script command @code{OUTPUT} can also specify the output file name.
819
820 @kindex -O @var{level}
821 @cindex generating optimized output
822 @item -O @var{level}
823 If @var{level} is a numeric values greater than zero @command{ld} optimizes
824 the output. This might take significantly longer and therefore probably
825 should only be enabled for the final binary. At the moment this
826 option only affects ELF shared library generation. Future releases of
827 the linker may make more use of this option. Also currently there is
828 no difference in the linker's behaviour for different non-zero values
829 of this option. Again this may change with future releases.
830
831 @kindex --push-state
832 @cindex push state governing input file handling
833 @item --push-state
834 The @option{--push-state} allows to preserve the current state of the
835 flags which govern the input file handling so that they can all be
836 restored with one corresponding @option{--pop-state} option.
837
838 The option which are covered are: @option{-Bdynamic}, @option{-Bstatic},
839 @option{-dn}, @option{-dy}, @option{-call_shared}, @option{-non_shared},
840 @option{-static}, @option{-N}, @option{-n}, @option{--whole-archive},
841 @option{--no-whole-archive}, @option{-r}, @option{-Ur},
842 @option{--copy-dt-needed-entries}, @option{--no-copy-dt-needed-entries},
843 @option{--as-needed}, @option{--no-as-needed}, and @option{-a}.
844
845 One target for this option are specifications for @file{pkg-config}. When
846 used with the @option{--libs} option all possibly needed libraries are
847 listed and then possibly linked with all the time. It is better to return
848 something as follows:
849
850 @smallexample
851 -Wl,--push-state,--as-needed -libone -libtwo -Wl,--pop-state
852 @end smallexample
853
854 @kindex --pop-state
855 @cindex pop state governing input file handling
856 Undoes the effect of --push-state, restores the previous values of the
857 flags governing input file handling.
858
859 @kindex -q
860 @kindex --emit-relocs
861 @cindex retain relocations in final executable
862 @item -q
863 @itemx --emit-relocs
864 Leave relocation sections and contents in fully linked executables.
865 Post link analysis and optimization tools may need this information in
866 order to perform correct modifications of executables. This results
867 in larger executables.
868
869 This option is currently only supported on ELF platforms.
870
871 @kindex --force-dynamic
872 @cindex forcing the creation of dynamic sections
873 @item --force-dynamic
874 Force the output file to have dynamic sections. This option is specific
875 to VxWorks targets.
876
877 @cindex partial link
878 @cindex relocatable output
879 @kindex -r
880 @kindex --relocatable
881 @item -r
882 @itemx --relocatable
883 Generate relocatable output---i.e., generate an output file that can in
884 turn serve as input to @command{ld}. This is often called @dfn{partial
885 linking}. As a side effect, in environments that support standard Unix
886 magic numbers, this option also sets the output file's magic number to
887 @code{OMAGIC}.
888 @c ; see @option{-N}.
889 If this option is not specified, an absolute file is produced. When
890 linking C++ programs, this option @emph{will not} resolve references to
891 constructors; to do that, use @samp{-Ur}.
892
893 When an input file does not have the same format as the output file,
894 partial linking is only supported if that input file does not contain any
895 relocations. Different output formats can have further restrictions; for
896 example some @code{a.out}-based formats do not support partial linking
897 with input files in other formats at all.
898
899 This option does the same thing as @samp{-i}.
900
901 @kindex -R @var{file}
902 @kindex --just-symbols=@var{file}
903 @cindex symbol-only input
904 @item -R @var{filename}
905 @itemx --just-symbols=@var{filename}
906 Read symbol names and their addresses from @var{filename}, but do not
907 relocate it or include it in the output. This allows your output file
908 to refer symbolically to absolute locations of memory defined in other
909 programs. You may use this option more than once.
910
911 For compatibility with other ELF linkers, if the @option{-R} option is
912 followed by a directory name, rather than a file name, it is treated as
913 the @option{-rpath} option.
914
915 @kindex -s
916 @kindex --strip-all
917 @cindex strip all symbols
918 @item -s
919 @itemx --strip-all
920 Omit all symbol information from the output file.
921
922 @kindex -S
923 @kindex --strip-debug
924 @cindex strip debugger symbols
925 @item -S
926 @itemx --strip-debug
927 Omit debugger symbol information (but not all symbols) from the output file.
928
929 @kindex -t
930 @kindex --trace
931 @cindex input files, displaying
932 @item -t
933 @itemx --trace
934 Print the names of the input files as @command{ld} processes them.
935
936 @kindex -T @var{script}
937 @kindex --script=@var{script}
938 @cindex script files
939 @item -T @var{scriptfile}
940 @itemx --script=@var{scriptfile}
941 Use @var{scriptfile} as the linker script. This script replaces
942 @command{ld}'s default linker script (rather than adding to it), so
943 @var{commandfile} must specify everything necessary to describe the
944 output file. @xref{Scripts}. If @var{scriptfile} does not exist in
945 the current directory, @code{ld} looks for it in the directories
946 specified by any preceding @samp{-L} options. Multiple @samp{-T}
947 options accumulate.
948
949 @kindex -dT @var{script}
950 @kindex --default-script=@var{script}
951 @cindex script files
952 @item -dT @var{scriptfile}
953 @itemx --default-script=@var{scriptfile}
954 Use @var{scriptfile} as the default linker script. @xref{Scripts}.
955
956 This option is similar to the @option{--script} option except that
957 processing of the script is delayed until after the rest of the
958 command line has been processed. This allows options placed after the
959 @option{--default-script} option on the command line to affect the
960 behaviour of the linker script, which can be important when the linker
961 command line cannot be directly controlled by the user. (eg because
962 the command line is being constructed by another tool, such as
963 @samp{gcc}).
964
965 @kindex -u @var{symbol}
966 @kindex --undefined=@var{symbol}
967 @cindex undefined symbol
968 @item -u @var{symbol}
969 @itemx --undefined=@var{symbol}
970 Force @var{symbol} to be entered in the output file as an undefined
971 symbol. Doing this may, for example, trigger linking of additional
972 modules from standard libraries. @samp{-u} may be repeated with
973 different option arguments to enter additional undefined symbols. This
974 option is equivalent to the @code{EXTERN} linker script command.
975
976 @kindex -Ur
977 @cindex constructors
978 @item -Ur
979 For anything other than C++ programs, this option is equivalent to
980 @samp{-r}: it generates relocatable output---i.e., an output file that can in
981 turn serve as input to @command{ld}. When linking C++ programs, @samp{-Ur}
982 @emph{does} resolve references to constructors, unlike @samp{-r}.
983 It does not work to use @samp{-Ur} on files that were themselves linked
984 with @samp{-Ur}; once the constructor table has been built, it cannot
985 be added to. Use @samp{-Ur} only for the last partial link, and
986 @samp{-r} for the others.
987
988 @kindex --unique[=@var{SECTION}]
989 @item --unique[=@var{SECTION}]
990 Creates a separate output section for every input section matching
991 @var{SECTION}, or if the optional wildcard @var{SECTION} argument is
992 missing, for every orphan input section. An orphan section is one not
993 specifically mentioned in a linker script. You may use this option
994 multiple times on the command line; It prevents the normal merging of
995 input sections with the same name, overriding output section assignments
996 in a linker script.
997
998 @kindex -v
999 @kindex -V
1000 @kindex --version
1001 @cindex version
1002 @item -v
1003 @itemx --version
1004 @itemx -V
1005 Display the version number for @command{ld}. The @option{-V} option also
1006 lists the supported emulations.
1007
1008 @kindex -x
1009 @kindex --discard-all
1010 @cindex deleting local symbols
1011 @item -x
1012 @itemx --discard-all
1013 Delete all local symbols.
1014
1015 @kindex -X
1016 @kindex --discard-locals
1017 @cindex local symbols, deleting
1018 @item -X
1019 @itemx --discard-locals
1020 Delete all temporary local symbols. (These symbols start with
1021 system-specific local label prefixes, typically @samp{.L} for ELF systems
1022 or @samp{L} for traditional a.out systems.)
1023
1024 @kindex -y @var{symbol}
1025 @kindex --trace-symbol=@var{symbol}
1026 @cindex symbol tracing
1027 @item -y @var{symbol}
1028 @itemx --trace-symbol=@var{symbol}
1029 Print the name of each linked file in which @var{symbol} appears. This
1030 option may be given any number of times. On many systems it is necessary
1031 to prepend an underscore.
1032
1033 This option is useful when you have an undefined symbol in your link but
1034 don't know where the reference is coming from.
1035
1036 @kindex -Y @var{path}
1037 @item -Y @var{path}
1038 Add @var{path} to the default library search path. This option exists
1039 for Solaris compatibility.
1040
1041 @kindex -z @var{keyword}
1042 @item -z @var{keyword}
1043 The recognized keywords are:
1044 @table @samp
1045
1046 @item combreloc
1047 Combines multiple reloc sections and sorts them to make dynamic symbol
1048 lookup caching possible.
1049
1050 @item defs
1051 Disallows undefined symbols in object files. Undefined symbols in
1052 shared libraries are still allowed.
1053
1054 @item execstack
1055 Marks the object as requiring executable stack.
1056
1057 @item global
1058 This option is only meaningful when building a shared object. It makes
1059 the symbols defined by this shared object available for symbol resolution
1060 of subsequently loaded libraries.
1061
1062 @item initfirst
1063 This option is only meaningful when building a shared object.
1064 It marks the object so that its runtime initialization will occur
1065 before the runtime initialization of any other objects brought into
1066 the process at the same time. Similarly the runtime finalization of
1067 the object will occur after the runtime finalization of any other
1068 objects.
1069
1070 @item interpose
1071 Marks the object that its symbol table interposes before all symbols
1072 but the primary executable.
1073
1074 @item lazy
1075 When generating an executable or shared library, mark it to tell the
1076 dynamic linker to defer function call resolution to the point when
1077 the function is called (lazy binding), rather than at load time.
1078 Lazy binding is the default.
1079
1080 @item loadfltr
1081 Marks the object that its filters be processed immediately at
1082 runtime.
1083
1084 @item muldefs
1085 Allows multiple definitions.
1086
1087 @item nocombreloc
1088 Disables multiple reloc sections combining.
1089
1090 @item nocopyreloc
1091 Disables production of copy relocs.
1092
1093 @item nodefaultlib
1094 Marks the object that the search for dependencies of this object will
1095 ignore any default library search paths.
1096
1097 @item nodelete
1098 Marks the object shouldn't be unloaded at runtime.
1099
1100 @item nodlopen
1101 Marks the object not available to @code{dlopen}.
1102
1103 @item nodump
1104 Marks the object can not be dumped by @code{dldump}.
1105
1106 @item noexecstack
1107 Marks the object as not requiring executable stack.
1108
1109 @item norelro
1110 Don't create an ELF @code{PT_GNU_RELRO} segment header in the object.
1111
1112 @item now
1113 When generating an executable or shared library, mark it to tell the
1114 dynamic linker to resolve all symbols when the program is started, or
1115 when the shared library is linked to using dlopen, instead of
1116 deferring function call resolution to the point when the function is
1117 first called.
1118
1119 @item origin
1120 Marks the object may contain $ORIGIN.
1121
1122 @item relro
1123 Create an ELF @code{PT_GNU_RELRO} segment header in the object.
1124
1125 @item max-page-size=@var{value}
1126 Set the emulation maximum page size to @var{value}.
1127
1128 @item common-page-size=@var{value}
1129 Set the emulation common page size to @var{value}.
1130
1131 @item stack-size=@var{value}
1132 Specify a stack size for in an ELF @code{PT_GNU_STACK} segment.
1133 Specifying zero will override any default non-zero sized
1134 @code{PT_GNU_STACK} segment creation.
1135
1136 @end table
1137
1138 Other keywords are ignored for Solaris compatibility.
1139
1140 @kindex -(
1141 @cindex groups of archives
1142 @item -( @var{archives} -)
1143 @itemx --start-group @var{archives} --end-group
1144 The @var{archives} should be a list of archive files. They may be
1145 either explicit file names, or @samp{-l} options.
1146
1147 The specified archives are searched repeatedly until no new undefined
1148 references are created. Normally, an archive is searched only once in
1149 the order that it is specified on the command line. If a symbol in that
1150 archive is needed to resolve an undefined symbol referred to by an
1151 object in an archive that appears later on the command line, the linker
1152 would not be able to resolve that reference. By grouping the archives,
1153 they all be searched repeatedly until all possible references are
1154 resolved.
1155
1156 Using this option has a significant performance cost. It is best to use
1157 it only when there are unavoidable circular references between two or
1158 more archives.
1159
1160 @kindex --accept-unknown-input-arch
1161 @kindex --no-accept-unknown-input-arch
1162 @item --accept-unknown-input-arch
1163 @itemx --no-accept-unknown-input-arch
1164 Tells the linker to accept input files whose architecture cannot be
1165 recognised. The assumption is that the user knows what they are doing
1166 and deliberately wants to link in these unknown input files. This was
1167 the default behaviour of the linker, before release 2.14. The default
1168 behaviour from release 2.14 onwards is to reject such input files, and
1169 so the @samp{--accept-unknown-input-arch} option has been added to
1170 restore the old behaviour.
1171
1172 @kindex --as-needed
1173 @kindex --no-as-needed
1174 @item --as-needed
1175 @itemx --no-as-needed
1176 This option affects ELF DT_NEEDED tags for dynamic libraries mentioned
1177 on the command line after the @option{--as-needed} option. Normally
1178 the linker will add a DT_NEEDED tag for each dynamic library mentioned
1179 on the command line, regardless of whether the library is actually
1180 needed or not. @option{--as-needed} causes a DT_NEEDED tag to only be
1181 emitted for a library that @emph{at that point in the link} satisfies a
1182 non-weak undefined symbol reference from a regular object file or, if
1183 the library is not found in the DT_NEEDED lists of other needed libraries, a
1184 non-weak undefined symbol reference from another needed dynamic library.
1185 Object files or libraries appearing on the command line @emph{after}
1186 the library in question do not affect whether the library is seen as
1187 needed. This is similar to the rules for extraction of object files
1188 from archives. @option{--no-as-needed} restores the default behaviour.
1189
1190 @kindex --add-needed
1191 @kindex --no-add-needed
1192 @item --add-needed
1193 @itemx --no-add-needed
1194 These two options have been deprecated because of the similarity of
1195 their names to the @option{--as-needed} and @option{--no-as-needed}
1196 options. They have been replaced by @option{--copy-dt-needed-entries}
1197 and @option{--no-copy-dt-needed-entries}.
1198
1199 @kindex -assert @var{keyword}
1200 @item -assert @var{keyword}
1201 This option is ignored for SunOS compatibility.
1202
1203 @kindex -Bdynamic
1204 @kindex -dy
1205 @kindex -call_shared
1206 @item -Bdynamic
1207 @itemx -dy
1208 @itemx -call_shared
1209 Link against dynamic libraries. This is only meaningful on platforms
1210 for which shared libraries are supported. This option is normally the
1211 default on such platforms. The different variants of this option are
1212 for compatibility with various systems. You may use this option
1213 multiple times on the command line: it affects library searching for
1214 @option{-l} options which follow it.
1215
1216 @kindex -Bgroup
1217 @item -Bgroup
1218 Set the @code{DF_1_GROUP} flag in the @code{DT_FLAGS_1} entry in the dynamic
1219 section. This causes the runtime linker to handle lookups in this
1220 object and its dependencies to be performed only inside the group.
1221 @option{--unresolved-symbols=report-all} is implied. This option is
1222 only meaningful on ELF platforms which support shared libraries.
1223
1224 @kindex -Bstatic
1225 @kindex -dn
1226 @kindex -non_shared
1227 @kindex -static
1228 @item -Bstatic
1229 @itemx -dn
1230 @itemx -non_shared
1231 @itemx -static
1232 Do not link against shared libraries. This is only meaningful on
1233 platforms for which shared libraries are supported. The different
1234 variants of this option are for compatibility with various systems. You
1235 may use this option multiple times on the command line: it affects
1236 library searching for @option{-l} options which follow it. This
1237 option also implies @option{--unresolved-symbols=report-all}. This
1238 option can be used with @option{-shared}. Doing so means that a
1239 shared library is being created but that all of the library's external
1240 references must be resolved by pulling in entries from static
1241 libraries.
1242
1243 @kindex -Bsymbolic
1244 @item -Bsymbolic
1245 When creating a shared library, bind references to global symbols to the
1246 definition within the shared library, if any. Normally, it is possible
1247 for a program linked against a shared library to override the definition
1248 within the shared library. This option is only meaningful on ELF
1249 platforms which support shared libraries.
1250
1251 @kindex -Bsymbolic-functions
1252 @item -Bsymbolic-functions
1253 When creating a shared library, bind references to global function
1254 symbols to the definition within the shared library, if any.
1255 This option is only meaningful on ELF platforms which support shared
1256 libraries.
1257
1258 @kindex --dynamic-list=@var{dynamic-list-file}
1259 @item --dynamic-list=@var{dynamic-list-file}
1260 Specify the name of a dynamic list file to the linker. This is
1261 typically used when creating shared libraries to specify a list of
1262 global symbols whose references shouldn't be bound to the definition
1263 within the shared library, or creating dynamically linked executables
1264 to specify a list of symbols which should be added to the symbol table
1265 in the executable. This option is only meaningful on ELF platforms
1266 which support shared libraries.
1267
1268 The format of the dynamic list is the same as the version node without
1269 scope and node name. See @ref{VERSION} for more information.
1270
1271 @kindex --dynamic-list-data
1272 @item --dynamic-list-data
1273 Include all global data symbols to the dynamic list.
1274
1275 @kindex --dynamic-list-cpp-new
1276 @item --dynamic-list-cpp-new
1277 Provide the builtin dynamic list for C++ operator new and delete. It
1278 is mainly useful for building shared libstdc++.
1279
1280 @kindex --dynamic-list-cpp-typeinfo
1281 @item --dynamic-list-cpp-typeinfo
1282 Provide the builtin dynamic list for C++ runtime type identification.
1283
1284 @kindex --check-sections
1285 @kindex --no-check-sections
1286 @item --check-sections
1287 @itemx --no-check-sections
1288 Asks the linker @emph{not} to check section addresses after they have
1289 been assigned to see if there are any overlaps. Normally the linker will
1290 perform this check, and if it finds any overlaps it will produce
1291 suitable error messages. The linker does know about, and does make
1292 allowances for sections in overlays. The default behaviour can be
1293 restored by using the command line switch @option{--check-sections}.
1294 Section overlap is not usually checked for relocatable links. You can
1295 force checking in that case by using the @option{--check-sections}
1296 option.
1297
1298 @kindex --copy-dt-needed-entries
1299 @kindex --no-copy-dt-needed-entries
1300 @item --copy-dt-needed-entries
1301 @itemx --no-copy-dt-needed-entries
1302 This option affects the treatment of dynamic libraries referred to
1303 by DT_NEEDED tags @emph{inside} ELF dynamic libraries mentioned on the
1304 command line. Normally the linker won't add a DT_NEEDED tag to the
1305 output binary for each library mentioned in a DT_NEEDED tag in an
1306 input dynamic library. With @option{--copy-dt-needed-entries}
1307 specified on the command line however any dynamic libraries that
1308 follow it will have their DT_NEEDED entries added. The default
1309 behaviour can be restored with @option{--no-copy-dt-needed-entries}.
1310
1311 This option also has an effect on the resolution of symbols in dynamic
1312 libraries. With @option{--copy-dt-needed-entries} dynamic libraries
1313 mentioned on the command line will be recursively searched, following
1314 their DT_NEEDED tags to other libraries, in order to resolve symbols
1315 required by the output binary. With the default setting however
1316 the searching of dynamic libraries that follow it will stop with the
1317 dynamic library itself. No DT_NEEDED links will be traversed to resolve
1318 symbols.
1319
1320 @cindex cross reference table
1321 @kindex --cref
1322 @item --cref
1323 Output a cross reference table. If a linker map file is being
1324 generated, the cross reference table is printed to the map file.
1325 Otherwise, it is printed on the standard output.
1326
1327 The format of the table is intentionally simple, so that it may be
1328 easily processed by a script if necessary. The symbols are printed out,
1329 sorted by name. For each symbol, a list of file names is given. If the
1330 symbol is defined, the first file listed is the location of the
1331 definition. If the symbol is defined as a common value then any files
1332 where this happens appear next. Finally any files that reference the
1333 symbol are listed.
1334
1335 @cindex common allocation
1336 @kindex --no-define-common
1337 @item --no-define-common
1338 This option inhibits the assignment of addresses to common symbols.
1339 The script command @code{INHIBIT_COMMON_ALLOCATION} has the same effect.
1340 @xref{Miscellaneous Commands}.
1341
1342 The @samp{--no-define-common} option allows decoupling
1343 the decision to assign addresses to Common symbols from the choice
1344 of the output file type; otherwise a non-Relocatable output type
1345 forces assigning addresses to Common symbols.
1346 Using @samp{--no-define-common} allows Common symbols that are referenced
1347 from a shared library to be assigned addresses only in the main program.
1348 This eliminates the unused duplicate space in the shared library,
1349 and also prevents any possible confusion over resolving to the wrong
1350 duplicate when there are many dynamic modules with specialized search
1351 paths for runtime symbol resolution.
1352
1353 @cindex symbols, from command line
1354 @kindex --defsym=@var{symbol}=@var{exp}
1355 @item --defsym=@var{symbol}=@var{expression}
1356 Create a global symbol in the output file, containing the absolute
1357 address given by @var{expression}. You may use this option as many
1358 times as necessary to define multiple symbols in the command line. A
1359 limited form of arithmetic is supported for the @var{expression} in this
1360 context: you may give a hexadecimal constant or the name of an existing
1361 symbol, or use @code{+} and @code{-} to add or subtract hexadecimal
1362 constants or symbols. If you need more elaborate expressions, consider
1363 using the linker command language from a script (@pxref{Assignments,,
1364 Assignment: Symbol Definitions}). @emph{Note:} there should be no white
1365 space between @var{symbol}, the equals sign (``@key{=}''), and
1366 @var{expression}.
1367
1368 @cindex demangling, from command line
1369 @kindex --demangle[=@var{style}]
1370 @kindex --no-demangle
1371 @item --demangle[=@var{style}]
1372 @itemx --no-demangle
1373 These options control whether to demangle symbol names in error messages
1374 and other output. When the linker is told to demangle, it tries to
1375 present symbol names in a readable fashion: it strips leading
1376 underscores if they are used by the object file format, and converts C++
1377 mangled symbol names into user readable names. Different compilers have
1378 different mangling styles. The optional demangling style argument can be used
1379 to choose an appropriate demangling style for your compiler. The linker will
1380 demangle by default unless the environment variable @samp{COLLECT_NO_DEMANGLE}
1381 is set. These options may be used to override the default.
1382
1383 @cindex dynamic linker, from command line
1384 @kindex -I@var{file}
1385 @kindex --dynamic-linker=@var{file}
1386 @item -I@var{file}
1387 @itemx --dynamic-linker=@var{file}
1388 Set the name of the dynamic linker. This is only meaningful when
1389 generating dynamically linked ELF executables. The default dynamic
1390 linker is normally correct; don't use this unless you know what you are
1391 doing.
1392
1393 @kindex --fatal-warnings
1394 @kindex --no-fatal-warnings
1395 @item --fatal-warnings
1396 @itemx --no-fatal-warnings
1397 Treat all warnings as errors. The default behaviour can be restored
1398 with the option @option{--no-fatal-warnings}.
1399
1400 @kindex --force-exe-suffix
1401 @item --force-exe-suffix
1402 Make sure that an output file has a .exe suffix.
1403
1404 If a successfully built fully linked output file does not have a
1405 @code{.exe} or @code{.dll} suffix, this option forces the linker to copy
1406 the output file to one of the same name with a @code{.exe} suffix. This
1407 option is useful when using unmodified Unix makefiles on a Microsoft
1408 Windows host, since some versions of Windows won't run an image unless
1409 it ends in a @code{.exe} suffix.
1410
1411 @kindex --gc-sections
1412 @kindex --no-gc-sections
1413 @cindex garbage collection
1414 @item --gc-sections
1415 @itemx --no-gc-sections
1416 Enable garbage collection of unused input sections. It is ignored on
1417 targets that do not support this option. The default behaviour (of not
1418 performing this garbage collection) can be restored by specifying
1419 @samp{--no-gc-sections} on the command line.
1420
1421 @samp{--gc-sections} decides which input sections are used by
1422 examining symbols and relocations. The section containing the entry
1423 symbol and all sections containing symbols undefined on the
1424 command-line will be kept, as will sections containing symbols
1425 referenced by dynamic objects. Note that when building shared
1426 libraries, the linker must assume that any visible symbol is
1427 referenced. Once this initial set of sections has been determined,
1428 the linker recursively marks as used any section referenced by their
1429 relocations. See @samp{--entry} and @samp{--undefined}.
1430
1431 This option can be set when doing a partial link (enabled with option
1432 @samp{-r}). In this case the root of symbols kept must be explicitly
1433 specified either by an @samp{--entry} or @samp{--undefined} option or by
1434 a @code{ENTRY} command in the linker script.
1435
1436 @kindex --print-gc-sections
1437 @kindex --no-print-gc-sections
1438 @cindex garbage collection
1439 @item --print-gc-sections
1440 @itemx --no-print-gc-sections
1441 List all sections removed by garbage collection. The listing is
1442 printed on stderr. This option is only effective if garbage
1443 collection has been enabled via the @samp{--gc-sections}) option. The
1444 default behaviour (of not listing the sections that are removed) can
1445 be restored by specifying @samp{--no-print-gc-sections} on the command
1446 line.
1447
1448 @kindex --print-output-format
1449 @cindex output format
1450 @item --print-output-format
1451 Print the name of the default output format (perhaps influenced by
1452 other command-line options). This is the string that would appear
1453 in an @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} linker script command (@pxref{File Commands}).
1454
1455 @cindex help
1456 @cindex usage
1457 @kindex --help
1458 @item --help
1459 Print a summary of the command-line options on the standard output and exit.
1460
1461 @kindex --target-help
1462 @item --target-help
1463 Print a summary of all target specific options on the standard output and exit.
1464
1465 @kindex -Map=@var{mapfile}
1466 @item -Map=@var{mapfile}
1467 Print a link map to the file @var{mapfile}. See the description of the
1468 @option{-M} option, above.
1469
1470 @cindex memory usage
1471 @kindex --no-keep-memory
1472 @item --no-keep-memory
1473 @command{ld} normally optimizes for speed over memory usage by caching the
1474 symbol tables of input files in memory. This option tells @command{ld} to
1475 instead optimize for memory usage, by rereading the symbol tables as
1476 necessary. This may be required if @command{ld} runs out of memory space
1477 while linking a large executable.
1478
1479 @kindex --no-undefined
1480 @kindex -z defs
1481 @item --no-undefined
1482 @itemx -z defs
1483 Report unresolved symbol references from regular object files. This
1484 is done even if the linker is creating a non-symbolic shared library.
1485 The switch @option{--[no-]allow-shlib-undefined} controls the
1486 behaviour for reporting unresolved references found in shared
1487 libraries being linked in.
1488
1489 @kindex --allow-multiple-definition
1490 @kindex -z muldefs
1491 @item --allow-multiple-definition
1492 @itemx -z muldefs
1493 Normally when a symbol is defined multiple times, the linker will
1494 report a fatal error. These options allow multiple definitions and the
1495 first definition will be used.
1496
1497 @kindex --allow-shlib-undefined
1498 @kindex --no-allow-shlib-undefined
1499 @item --allow-shlib-undefined
1500 @itemx --no-allow-shlib-undefined
1501 Allows or disallows undefined symbols in shared libraries.
1502 This switch is similar to @option{--no-undefined} except that it
1503 determines the behaviour when the undefined symbols are in a
1504 shared library rather than a regular object file. It does not affect
1505 how undefined symbols in regular object files are handled.
1506
1507 The default behaviour is to report errors for any undefined symbols
1508 referenced in shared libraries if the linker is being used to create
1509 an executable, but to allow them if the linker is being used to create
1510 a shared library.
1511
1512 The reasons for allowing undefined symbol references in shared
1513 libraries specified at link time are that:
1514
1515 @itemize @bullet
1516 @item
1517 A shared library specified at link time may not be the same as the one
1518 that is available at load time, so the symbol might actually be
1519 resolvable at load time.
1520 @item
1521 There are some operating systems, eg BeOS and HPPA, where undefined
1522 symbols in shared libraries are normal.
1523
1524 The BeOS kernel for example patches shared libraries at load time to
1525 select whichever function is most appropriate for the current
1526 architecture. This is used, for example, to dynamically select an
1527 appropriate memset function.
1528 @end itemize
1529
1530 @kindex --no-undefined-version
1531 @item --no-undefined-version
1532 Normally when a symbol has an undefined version, the linker will ignore
1533 it. This option disallows symbols with undefined version and a fatal error
1534 will be issued instead.
1535
1536 @kindex --default-symver
1537 @item --default-symver
1538 Create and use a default symbol version (the soname) for unversioned
1539 exported symbols.
1540
1541 @kindex --default-imported-symver
1542 @item --default-imported-symver
1543 Create and use a default symbol version (the soname) for unversioned
1544 imported symbols.
1545
1546 @kindex --no-warn-mismatch
1547 @item --no-warn-mismatch
1548 Normally @command{ld} will give an error if you try to link together input
1549 files that are mismatched for some reason, perhaps because they have
1550 been compiled for different processors or for different endiannesses.
1551 This option tells @command{ld} that it should silently permit such possible
1552 errors. This option should only be used with care, in cases when you
1553 have taken some special action that ensures that the linker errors are
1554 inappropriate.
1555
1556 @kindex --no-warn-search-mismatch
1557 @item --no-warn-search-mismatch
1558 Normally @command{ld} will give a warning if it finds an incompatible
1559 library during a library search. This option silences the warning.
1560
1561 @kindex --no-whole-archive
1562 @item --no-whole-archive
1563 Turn off the effect of the @option{--whole-archive} option for subsequent
1564 archive files.
1565
1566 @cindex output file after errors
1567 @kindex --noinhibit-exec
1568 @item --noinhibit-exec
1569 Retain the executable output file whenever it is still usable.
1570 Normally, the linker will not produce an output file if it encounters
1571 errors during the link process; it exits without writing an output file
1572 when it issues any error whatsoever.
1573
1574 @kindex -nostdlib
1575 @item -nostdlib
1576 Only search library directories explicitly specified on the
1577 command line. Library directories specified in linker scripts
1578 (including linker scripts specified on the command line) are ignored.
1579
1580 @ifclear SingleFormat
1581 @kindex --oformat=@var{output-format}
1582 @item --oformat=@var{output-format}
1583 @command{ld} may be configured to support more than one kind of object
1584 file. If your @command{ld} is configured this way, you can use the
1585 @samp{--oformat} option to specify the binary format for the output
1586 object file. Even when @command{ld} is configured to support alternative
1587 object formats, you don't usually need to specify this, as @command{ld}
1588 should be configured to produce as a default output format the most
1589 usual format on each machine. @var{output-format} is a text string, the
1590 name of a particular format supported by the BFD libraries. (You can
1591 list the available binary formats with @samp{objdump -i}.) The script
1592 command @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} can also specify the output format, but
1593 this option overrides it. @xref{BFD}.
1594 @end ifclear
1595
1596 @kindex -pie
1597 @kindex --pic-executable
1598 @item -pie
1599 @itemx --pic-executable
1600 @cindex position independent executables
1601 Create a position independent executable. This is currently only supported on
1602 ELF platforms. Position independent executables are similar to shared
1603 libraries in that they are relocated by the dynamic linker to the virtual
1604 address the OS chooses for them (which can vary between invocations). Like
1605 normal dynamically linked executables they can be executed and symbols
1606 defined in the executable cannot be overridden by shared libraries.
1607
1608 @kindex -qmagic
1609 @item -qmagic
1610 This option is ignored for Linux compatibility.
1611
1612 @kindex -Qy
1613 @item -Qy
1614 This option is ignored for SVR4 compatibility.
1615
1616 @kindex --relax
1617 @cindex synthesizing linker
1618 @cindex relaxing addressing modes
1619 @cindex --no-relax
1620 @item --relax
1621 @itemx --no-relax
1622 An option with machine dependent effects.
1623 @ifset GENERIC
1624 This option is only supported on a few targets.
1625 @end ifset
1626 @ifset H8300
1627 @xref{H8/300,,@command{ld} and the H8/300}.
1628 @end ifset
1629 @ifset I960
1630 @xref{i960,, @command{ld} and the Intel 960 family}.
1631 @end ifset
1632 @ifset XTENSA
1633 @xref{Xtensa,, @command{ld} and Xtensa Processors}.
1634 @end ifset
1635 @ifset M68HC11
1636 @xref{M68HC11/68HC12,,@command{ld} and the 68HC11 and 68HC12}.
1637 @end ifset
1638 @ifset NIOSII
1639 @xref{Nios II,,@command{ld} and the Altera Nios II}.
1640 @end ifset
1641 @ifset POWERPC
1642 @xref{PowerPC ELF32,,@command{ld} and PowerPC 32-bit ELF Support}.
1643 @end ifset
1644
1645 On some platforms the @samp{--relax} option performs target specific,
1646 global optimizations that become possible when the linker resolves
1647 addressing in the program, such as relaxing address modes,
1648 synthesizing new instructions, selecting shorter version of current
1649 instructions, and combining constant values.
1650
1651 On some platforms these link time global optimizations may make symbolic
1652 debugging of the resulting executable impossible.
1653 @ifset GENERIC
1654 This is known to be the case for the Matsushita MN10200 and MN10300
1655 family of processors.
1656 @end ifset
1657
1658 @ifset GENERIC
1659 On platforms where this is not supported, @samp{--relax} is accepted,
1660 but ignored.
1661 @end ifset
1662
1663 On platforms where @samp{--relax} is accepted the option
1664 @samp{--no-relax} can be used to disable the feature.
1665
1666 @cindex retaining specified symbols
1667 @cindex stripping all but some symbols
1668 @cindex symbols, retaining selectively
1669 @kindex --retain-symbols-file=@var{filename}
1670 @item --retain-symbols-file=@var{filename}
1671 Retain @emph{only} the symbols listed in the file @var{filename},
1672 discarding all others. @var{filename} is simply a flat file, with one
1673 symbol name per line. This option is especially useful in environments
1674 @ifset GENERIC
1675 (such as VxWorks)
1676 @end ifset
1677 where a large global symbol table is accumulated gradually, to conserve
1678 run-time memory.
1679
1680 @samp{--retain-symbols-file} does @emph{not} discard undefined symbols,
1681 or symbols needed for relocations.
1682
1683 You may only specify @samp{--retain-symbols-file} once in the command
1684 line. It overrides @samp{-s} and @samp{-S}.
1685
1686 @ifset GENERIC
1687 @item -rpath=@var{dir}
1688 @cindex runtime library search path
1689 @kindex -rpath=@var{dir}
1690 Add a directory to the runtime library search path. This is used when
1691 linking an ELF executable with shared objects. All @option{-rpath}
1692 arguments are concatenated and passed to the runtime linker, which uses
1693 them to locate shared objects at runtime. The @option{-rpath} option is
1694 also used when locating shared objects which are needed by shared
1695 objects explicitly included in the link; see the description of the
1696 @option{-rpath-link} option. If @option{-rpath} is not used when linking an
1697 ELF executable, the contents of the environment variable
1698 @code{LD_RUN_PATH} will be used if it is defined.
1699
1700 The @option{-rpath} option may also be used on SunOS. By default, on
1701 SunOS, the linker will form a runtime search patch out of all the
1702 @option{-L} options it is given. If a @option{-rpath} option is used, the
1703 runtime search path will be formed exclusively using the @option{-rpath}
1704 options, ignoring the @option{-L} options. This can be useful when using
1705 gcc, which adds many @option{-L} options which may be on NFS mounted
1706 file systems.
1707
1708 For compatibility with other ELF linkers, if the @option{-R} option is
1709 followed by a directory name, rather than a file name, it is treated as
1710 the @option{-rpath} option.
1711 @end ifset
1712
1713 @ifset GENERIC
1714 @cindex link-time runtime library search path
1715 @kindex -rpath-link=@var{dir}
1716 @item -rpath-link=@var{dir}
1717 When using ELF or SunOS, one shared library may require another. This
1718 happens when an @code{ld -shared} link includes a shared library as one
1719 of the input files.
1720
1721 When the linker encounters such a dependency when doing a non-shared,
1722 non-relocatable link, it will automatically try to locate the required
1723 shared library and include it in the link, if it is not included
1724 explicitly. In such a case, the @option{-rpath-link} option
1725 specifies the first set of directories to search. The
1726 @option{-rpath-link} option may specify a sequence of directory names
1727 either by specifying a list of names separated by colons, or by
1728 appearing multiple times.
1729
1730 This option should be used with caution as it overrides the search path
1731 that may have been hard compiled into a shared library. In such a case it
1732 is possible to use unintentionally a different search path than the
1733 runtime linker would do.
1734
1735 The linker uses the following search paths to locate required shared
1736 libraries:
1737 @enumerate
1738 @item
1739 Any directories specified by @option{-rpath-link} options.
1740 @item
1741 Any directories specified by @option{-rpath} options. The difference
1742 between @option{-rpath} and @option{-rpath-link} is that directories
1743 specified by @option{-rpath} options are included in the executable and
1744 used at runtime, whereas the @option{-rpath-link} option is only effective
1745 at link time. Searching @option{-rpath} in this way is only supported
1746 by native linkers and cross linkers which have been configured with
1747 the @option{--with-sysroot} option.
1748 @item
1749 On an ELF system, for native linkers, if the @option{-rpath} and
1750 @option{-rpath-link} options were not used, search the contents of the
1751 environment variable @code{LD_RUN_PATH}.
1752 @item
1753 On SunOS, if the @option{-rpath} option was not used, search any
1754 directories specified using @option{-L} options.
1755 @item
1756 For a native linker, search the contents of the environment
1757 variable @code{LD_LIBRARY_PATH}.
1758 @item
1759 For a native ELF linker, the directories in @code{DT_RUNPATH} or
1760 @code{DT_RPATH} of a shared library are searched for shared
1761 libraries needed by it. The @code{DT_RPATH} entries are ignored if
1762 @code{DT_RUNPATH} entries exist.
1763 @item
1764 The default directories, normally @file{/lib} and @file{/usr/lib}.
1765 @item
1766 For a native linker on an ELF system, if the file @file{/etc/ld.so.conf}
1767 exists, the list of directories found in that file.
1768 @end enumerate
1769
1770 If the required shared library is not found, the linker will issue a
1771 warning and continue with the link.
1772 @end ifset
1773
1774 @kindex -shared
1775 @kindex -Bshareable
1776 @item -shared
1777 @itemx -Bshareable
1778 @cindex shared libraries
1779 Create a shared library. This is currently only supported on ELF, XCOFF
1780 and SunOS platforms. On SunOS, the linker will automatically create a
1781 shared library if the @option{-e} option is not used and there are
1782 undefined symbols in the link.
1783
1784 @kindex --sort-common
1785 @item --sort-common
1786 @itemx --sort-common=ascending
1787 @itemx --sort-common=descending
1788 This option tells @command{ld} to sort the common symbols by alignment in
1789 ascending or descending order when it places them in the appropriate output
1790 sections. The symbol alignments considered are sixteen-byte or larger,
1791 eight-byte, four-byte, two-byte, and one-byte. This is to prevent gaps
1792 between symbols due to alignment constraints. If no sorting order is
1793 specified, then descending order is assumed.
1794
1795 @kindex --sort-section=name
1796 @item --sort-section=name
1797 This option will apply @code{SORT_BY_NAME} to all wildcard section
1798 patterns in the linker script.
1799
1800 @kindex --sort-section=alignment
1801 @item --sort-section=alignment
1802 This option will apply @code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} to all wildcard section
1803 patterns in the linker script.
1804
1805 @kindex --split-by-file
1806 @item --split-by-file[=@var{size}]
1807 Similar to @option{--split-by-reloc} but creates a new output section for
1808 each input file when @var{size} is reached. @var{size} defaults to a
1809 size of 1 if not given.
1810
1811 @kindex --split-by-reloc
1812 @item --split-by-reloc[=@var{count}]
1813 Tries to creates extra sections in the output file so that no single
1814 output section in the file contains more than @var{count} relocations.
1815 This is useful when generating huge relocatable files for downloading into
1816 certain real time kernels with the COFF object file format; since COFF
1817 cannot represent more than 65535 relocations in a single section. Note
1818 that this will fail to work with object file formats which do not
1819 support arbitrary sections. The linker will not split up individual
1820 input sections for redistribution, so if a single input section contains
1821 more than @var{count} relocations one output section will contain that
1822 many relocations. @var{count} defaults to a value of 32768.
1823
1824 @kindex --stats
1825 @item --stats
1826 Compute and display statistics about the operation of the linker, such
1827 as execution time and memory usage.
1828
1829 @kindex --sysroot=@var{directory}
1830 @item --sysroot=@var{directory}
1831 Use @var{directory} as the location of the sysroot, overriding the
1832 configure-time default. This option is only supported by linkers
1833 that were configured using @option{--with-sysroot}.
1834
1835 @kindex --traditional-format
1836 @cindex traditional format
1837 @item --traditional-format
1838 For some targets, the output of @command{ld} is different in some ways from
1839 the output of some existing linker. This switch requests @command{ld} to
1840 use the traditional format instead.
1841
1842 @cindex dbx
1843 For example, on SunOS, @command{ld} combines duplicate entries in the
1844 symbol string table. This can reduce the size of an output file with
1845 full debugging information by over 30 percent. Unfortunately, the SunOS
1846 @code{dbx} program can not read the resulting program (@code{gdb} has no
1847 trouble). The @samp{--traditional-format} switch tells @command{ld} to not
1848 combine duplicate entries.
1849
1850 @kindex --section-start=@var{sectionname}=@var{org}
1851 @item --section-start=@var{sectionname}=@var{org}
1852 Locate a section in the output file at the absolute
1853 address given by @var{org}. You may use this option as many
1854 times as necessary to locate multiple sections in the command
1855 line.
1856 @var{org} must be a single hexadecimal integer;
1857 for compatibility with other linkers, you may omit the leading
1858 @samp{0x} usually associated with hexadecimal values. @emph{Note:} there
1859 should be no white space between @var{sectionname}, the equals
1860 sign (``@key{=}''), and @var{org}.
1861
1862 @kindex -Tbss=@var{org}
1863 @kindex -Tdata=@var{org}
1864 @kindex -Ttext=@var{org}
1865 @cindex segment origins, cmd line
1866 @item -Tbss=@var{org}
1867 @itemx -Tdata=@var{org}
1868 @itemx -Ttext=@var{org}
1869 Same as @option{--section-start}, with @code{.bss}, @code{.data} or
1870 @code{.text} as the @var{sectionname}.
1871
1872 @kindex -Ttext-segment=@var{org}
1873 @item -Ttext-segment=@var{org}
1874 @cindex text segment origin, cmd line
1875 When creating an ELF executable, it will set the address of the first
1876 byte of the text segment.
1877
1878 @kindex -Trodata-segment=@var{org}
1879 @item -Trodata-segment=@var{org}
1880 @cindex rodata segment origin, cmd line
1881 When creating an ELF executable or shared object for a target where
1882 the read-only data is in its own segment separate from the executable
1883 text, it will set the address of the first byte of the read-only data segment.
1884
1885 @kindex -Tldata-segment=@var{org}
1886 @item -Tldata-segment=@var{org}
1887 @cindex ldata segment origin, cmd line
1888 When creating an ELF executable or shared object for x86-64 medium memory
1889 model, it will set the address of the first byte of the ldata segment.
1890
1891 @kindex --unresolved-symbols
1892 @item --unresolved-symbols=@var{method}
1893 Determine how to handle unresolved symbols. There are four possible
1894 values for @samp{method}:
1895
1896 @table @samp
1897 @item ignore-all
1898 Do not report any unresolved symbols.
1899
1900 @item report-all
1901 Report all unresolved symbols. This is the default.
1902
1903 @item ignore-in-object-files
1904 Report unresolved symbols that are contained in shared libraries, but
1905 ignore them if they come from regular object files.
1906
1907 @item ignore-in-shared-libs
1908 Report unresolved symbols that come from regular object files, but
1909 ignore them if they come from shared libraries. This can be useful
1910 when creating a dynamic binary and it is known that all the shared
1911 libraries that it should be referencing are included on the linker's
1912 command line.
1913 @end table
1914
1915 The behaviour for shared libraries on their own can also be controlled
1916 by the @option{--[no-]allow-shlib-undefined} option.
1917
1918 Normally the linker will generate an error message for each reported
1919 unresolved symbol but the option @option{--warn-unresolved-symbols}
1920 can change this to a warning.
1921
1922 @kindex --verbose[=@var{NUMBER}]
1923 @cindex verbose[=@var{NUMBER}]
1924 @item --dll-verbose
1925 @itemx --verbose[=@var{NUMBER}]
1926 Display the version number for @command{ld} and list the linker emulations
1927 supported. Display which input files can and cannot be opened. Display
1928 the linker script being used by the linker. If the optional @var{NUMBER}
1929 argument > 1, plugin symbol status will also be displayed.
1930
1931 @kindex --version-script=@var{version-scriptfile}
1932 @cindex version script, symbol versions
1933 @item --version-script=@var{version-scriptfile}
1934 Specify the name of a version script to the linker. This is typically
1935 used when creating shared libraries to specify additional information
1936 about the version hierarchy for the library being created. This option
1937 is only fully supported on ELF platforms which support shared libraries;
1938 see @ref{VERSION}. It is partially supported on PE platforms, which can
1939 use version scripts to filter symbol visibility in auto-export mode: any
1940 symbols marked @samp{local} in the version script will not be exported.
1941 @xref{WIN32}.
1942
1943 @kindex --warn-common
1944 @cindex warnings, on combining symbols
1945 @cindex combining symbols, warnings on
1946 @item --warn-common
1947 Warn when a common symbol is combined with another common symbol or with
1948 a symbol definition. Unix linkers allow this somewhat sloppy practice,
1949 but linkers on some other operating systems do not. This option allows
1950 you to find potential problems from combining global symbols.
1951 Unfortunately, some C libraries use this practice, so you may get some
1952 warnings about symbols in the libraries as well as in your programs.
1953
1954 There are three kinds of global symbols, illustrated here by C examples:
1955
1956 @table @samp
1957 @item int i = 1;
1958 A definition, which goes in the initialized data section of the output
1959 file.
1960
1961 @item extern int i;
1962 An undefined reference, which does not allocate space.
1963 There must be either a definition or a common symbol for the
1964 variable somewhere.
1965
1966 @item int i;
1967 A common symbol. If there are only (one or more) common symbols for a
1968 variable, it goes in the uninitialized data area of the output file.
1969 The linker merges multiple common symbols for the same variable into a
1970 single symbol. If they are of different sizes, it picks the largest
1971 size. The linker turns a common symbol into a declaration, if there is
1972 a definition of the same variable.
1973 @end table
1974
1975 The @samp{--warn-common} option can produce five kinds of warnings.
1976 Each warning consists of a pair of lines: the first describes the symbol
1977 just encountered, and the second describes the previous symbol
1978 encountered with the same name. One or both of the two symbols will be
1979 a common symbol.
1980
1981 @enumerate
1982 @item
1983 Turning a common symbol into a reference, because there is already a
1984 definition for the symbol.
1985 @smallexample
1986 @var{file}(@var{section}): warning: common of `@var{symbol}'
1987 overridden by definition
1988 @var{file}(@var{section}): warning: defined here
1989 @end smallexample
1990
1991 @item
1992 Turning a common symbol into a reference, because a later definition for
1993 the symbol is encountered. This is the same as the previous case,
1994 except that the symbols are encountered in a different order.
1995 @smallexample
1996 @var{file}(@var{section}): warning: definition of `@var{symbol}'
1997 overriding common
1998 @var{file}(@var{section}): warning: common is here
1999 @end smallexample
2000
2001 @item
2002 Merging a common symbol with a previous same-sized common symbol.
2003 @smallexample
2004 @var{file}(@var{section}): warning: multiple common
2005 of `@var{symbol}'
2006 @var{file}(@var{section}): warning: previous common is here
2007 @end smallexample
2008
2009 @item
2010 Merging a common symbol with a previous larger common symbol.
2011 @smallexample
2012 @var{file}(@var{section}): warning: common of `@var{symbol}'
2013 overridden by larger common
2014 @var{file}(@var{section}): warning: larger common is here
2015 @end smallexample
2016
2017 @item
2018 Merging a common symbol with a previous smaller common symbol. This is
2019 the same as the previous case, except that the symbols are
2020 encountered in a different order.
2021 @smallexample
2022 @var{file}(@var{section}): warning: common of `@var{symbol}'
2023 overriding smaller common
2024 @var{file}(@var{section}): warning: smaller common is here
2025 @end smallexample
2026 @end enumerate
2027
2028 @kindex --warn-constructors
2029 @item --warn-constructors
2030 Warn if any global constructors are used. This is only useful for a few
2031 object file formats. For formats like COFF or ELF, the linker can not
2032 detect the use of global constructors.
2033
2034 @kindex --warn-multiple-gp
2035 @item --warn-multiple-gp
2036 Warn if multiple global pointer values are required in the output file.
2037 This is only meaningful for certain processors, such as the Alpha.
2038 Specifically, some processors put large-valued constants in a special
2039 section. A special register (the global pointer) points into the middle
2040 of this section, so that constants can be loaded efficiently via a
2041 base-register relative addressing mode. Since the offset in
2042 base-register relative mode is fixed and relatively small (e.g., 16
2043 bits), this limits the maximum size of the constant pool. Thus, in
2044 large programs, it is often necessary to use multiple global pointer
2045 values in order to be able to address all possible constants. This
2046 option causes a warning to be issued whenever this case occurs.
2047
2048 @kindex --warn-once
2049 @cindex warnings, on undefined symbols
2050 @cindex undefined symbols, warnings on
2051 @item --warn-once
2052 Only warn once for each undefined symbol, rather than once per module
2053 which refers to it.
2054
2055 @kindex --warn-section-align
2056 @cindex warnings, on section alignment
2057 @cindex section alignment, warnings on
2058 @item --warn-section-align
2059 Warn if the address of an output section is changed because of
2060 alignment. Typically, the alignment will be set by an input section.
2061 The address will only be changed if it not explicitly specified; that
2062 is, if the @code{SECTIONS} command does not specify a start address for
2063 the section (@pxref{SECTIONS}).
2064
2065 @kindex --warn-shared-textrel
2066 @item --warn-shared-textrel
2067 Warn if the linker adds a DT_TEXTREL to a shared object.
2068
2069 @kindex --warn-alternate-em
2070 @item --warn-alternate-em
2071 Warn if an object has alternate ELF machine code.
2072
2073 @kindex --warn-unresolved-symbols
2074 @item --warn-unresolved-symbols
2075 If the linker is going to report an unresolved symbol (see the option
2076 @option{--unresolved-symbols}) it will normally generate an error.
2077 This option makes it generate a warning instead.
2078
2079 @kindex --error-unresolved-symbols
2080 @item --error-unresolved-symbols
2081 This restores the linker's default behaviour of generating errors when
2082 it is reporting unresolved symbols.
2083
2084 @kindex --whole-archive
2085 @cindex including an entire archive
2086 @item --whole-archive
2087 For each archive mentioned on the command line after the
2088 @option{--whole-archive} option, include every object file in the archive
2089 in the link, rather than searching the archive for the required object
2090 files. This is normally used to turn an archive file into a shared
2091 library, forcing every object to be included in the resulting shared
2092 library. This option may be used more than once.
2093
2094 Two notes when using this option from gcc: First, gcc doesn't know
2095 about this option, so you have to use @option{-Wl,-whole-archive}.
2096 Second, don't forget to use @option{-Wl,-no-whole-archive} after your
2097 list of archives, because gcc will add its own list of archives to
2098 your link and you may not want this flag to affect those as well.
2099
2100 @kindex --wrap=@var{symbol}
2101 @item --wrap=@var{symbol}
2102 Use a wrapper function for @var{symbol}. Any undefined reference to
2103 @var{symbol} will be resolved to @code{__wrap_@var{symbol}}. Any
2104 undefined reference to @code{__real_@var{symbol}} will be resolved to
2105 @var{symbol}.
2106
2107 This can be used to provide a wrapper for a system function. The
2108 wrapper function should be called @code{__wrap_@var{symbol}}. If it
2109 wishes to call the system function, it should call
2110 @code{__real_@var{symbol}}.
2111
2112 Here is a trivial example:
2113
2114 @smallexample
2115 void *
2116 __wrap_malloc (size_t c)
2117 @{
2118 printf ("malloc called with %zu\n", c);
2119 return __real_malloc (c);
2120 @}
2121 @end smallexample
2122
2123 If you link other code with this file using @option{--wrap malloc}, then
2124 all calls to @code{malloc} will call the function @code{__wrap_malloc}
2125 instead. The call to @code{__real_malloc} in @code{__wrap_malloc} will
2126 call the real @code{malloc} function.
2127
2128 You may wish to provide a @code{__real_malloc} function as well, so that
2129 links without the @option{--wrap} option will succeed. If you do this,
2130 you should not put the definition of @code{__real_malloc} in the same
2131 file as @code{__wrap_malloc}; if you do, the assembler may resolve the
2132 call before the linker has a chance to wrap it to @code{malloc}.
2133
2134 @kindex --eh-frame-hdr
2135 @item --eh-frame-hdr
2136 Request creation of @code{.eh_frame_hdr} section and ELF
2137 @code{PT_GNU_EH_FRAME} segment header.
2138
2139 @kindex --ld-generated-unwind-info
2140 @item --no-ld-generated-unwind-info
2141 Request creation of @code{.eh_frame} unwind info for linker
2142 generated code sections like PLT. This option is on by default
2143 if linker generated unwind info is supported.
2144
2145 @kindex --enable-new-dtags
2146 @kindex --disable-new-dtags
2147 @item --enable-new-dtags
2148 @itemx --disable-new-dtags
2149 This linker can create the new dynamic tags in ELF. But the older ELF
2150 systems may not understand them. If you specify
2151 @option{--enable-new-dtags}, the new dynamic tags will be created as needed
2152 and older dynamic tags will be omitted.
2153 If you specify @option{--disable-new-dtags}, no new dynamic tags will be
2154 created. By default, the new dynamic tags are not created. Note that
2155 those options are only available for ELF systems.
2156
2157 @kindex --hash-size=@var{number}
2158 @item --hash-size=@var{number}
2159 Set the default size of the linker's hash tables to a prime number
2160 close to @var{number}. Increasing this value can reduce the length of
2161 time it takes the linker to perform its tasks, at the expense of
2162 increasing the linker's memory requirements. Similarly reducing this
2163 value can reduce the memory requirements at the expense of speed.
2164
2165 @kindex --hash-style=@var{style}
2166 @item --hash-style=@var{style}
2167 Set the type of linker's hash table(s). @var{style} can be either
2168 @code{sysv} for classic ELF @code{.hash} section, @code{gnu} for
2169 new style GNU @code{.gnu.hash} section or @code{both} for both
2170 the classic ELF @code{.hash} and new style GNU @code{.gnu.hash}
2171 hash tables. The default is @code{sysv}.
2172
2173 @kindex --reduce-memory-overheads
2174 @item --reduce-memory-overheads
2175 This option reduces memory requirements at ld runtime, at the expense of
2176 linking speed. This was introduced to select the old O(n^2) algorithm
2177 for link map file generation, rather than the new O(n) algorithm which uses
2178 about 40% more memory for symbol storage.
2179
2180 Another effect of the switch is to set the default hash table size to
2181 1021, which again saves memory at the cost of lengthening the linker's
2182 run time. This is not done however if the @option{--hash-size} switch
2183 has been used.
2184
2185 The @option{--reduce-memory-overheads} switch may be also be used to
2186 enable other tradeoffs in future versions of the linker.
2187
2188 @kindex --build-id
2189 @kindex --build-id=@var{style}
2190 @item --build-id
2191 @itemx --build-id=@var{style}
2192 Request the creation of a @code{.note.gnu.build-id} ELF note section
2193 or a @code{.build-id} COFF section. The contents of the note are
2194 unique bits identifying this linked file. @var{style} can be
2195 @code{uuid} to use 128 random bits, @code{sha1} to use a 160-bit
2196 @sc{SHA1} hash on the normative parts of the output contents,
2197 @code{md5} to use a 128-bit @sc{MD5} hash on the normative parts of
2198 the output contents, or @code{0x@var{hexstring}} to use a chosen bit
2199 string specified as an even number of hexadecimal digits (@code{-} and
2200 @code{:} characters between digit pairs are ignored). If @var{style}
2201 is omitted, @code{sha1} is used.
2202
2203 The @code{md5} and @code{sha1} styles produces an identifier
2204 that is always the same in an identical output file, but will be
2205 unique among all nonidentical output files. It is not intended
2206 to be compared as a checksum for the file's contents. A linked
2207 file may be changed later by other tools, but the build ID bit
2208 string identifying the original linked file does not change.
2209
2210 Passing @code{none} for @var{style} disables the setting from any
2211 @code{--build-id} options earlier on the command line.
2212 @end table
2213
2214 @c man end
2215
2216 @subsection Options Specific to i386 PE Targets
2217
2218 @c man begin OPTIONS
2219
2220 The i386 PE linker supports the @option{-shared} option, which causes
2221 the output to be a dynamically linked library (DLL) instead of a
2222 normal executable. You should name the output @code{*.dll} when you
2223 use this option. In addition, the linker fully supports the standard
2224 @code{*.def} files, which may be specified on the linker command line
2225 like an object file (in fact, it should precede archives it exports
2226 symbols from, to ensure that they get linked in, just like a normal
2227 object file).
2228
2229 In addition to the options common to all targets, the i386 PE linker
2230 support additional command line options that are specific to the i386
2231 PE target. Options that take values may be separated from their
2232 values by either a space or an equals sign.
2233
2234 @table @gcctabopt
2235
2236 @kindex --add-stdcall-alias
2237 @item --add-stdcall-alias
2238 If given, symbols with a stdcall suffix (@@@var{nn}) will be exported
2239 as-is and also with the suffix stripped.
2240 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2241
2242 @kindex --base-file
2243 @item --base-file @var{file}
2244 Use @var{file} as the name of a file in which to save the base
2245 addresses of all the relocations needed for generating DLLs with
2246 @file{dlltool}.
2247 [This is an i386 PE specific option]
2248
2249 @kindex --dll
2250 @item --dll
2251 Create a DLL instead of a regular executable. You may also use
2252 @option{-shared} or specify a @code{LIBRARY} in a given @code{.def}
2253 file.
2254 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2255
2256 @kindex --enable-long-section-names
2257 @kindex --disable-long-section-names
2258 @item --enable-long-section-names
2259 @itemx --disable-long-section-names
2260 The PE variants of the Coff object format add an extension that permits
2261 the use of section names longer than eight characters, the normal limit
2262 for Coff. By default, these names are only allowed in object files, as
2263 fully-linked executable images do not carry the Coff string table required
2264 to support the longer names. As a GNU extension, it is possible to
2265 allow their use in executable images as well, or to (probably pointlessly!)
2266 disallow it in object files, by using these two options. Executable images
2267 generated with these long section names are slightly non-standard, carrying
2268 as they do a string table, and may generate confusing output when examined
2269 with non-GNU PE-aware tools, such as file viewers and dumpers. However,
2270 GDB relies on the use of PE long section names to find Dwarf-2 debug
2271 information sections in an executable image at runtime, and so if neither
2272 option is specified on the command-line, @command{ld} will enable long
2273 section names, overriding the default and technically correct behaviour,
2274 when it finds the presence of debug information while linking an executable
2275 image and not stripping symbols.
2276 [This option is valid for all PE targeted ports of the linker]
2277
2278 @kindex --enable-stdcall-fixup
2279 @kindex --disable-stdcall-fixup
2280 @item --enable-stdcall-fixup
2281 @itemx --disable-stdcall-fixup
2282 If the link finds a symbol that it cannot resolve, it will attempt to
2283 do ``fuzzy linking'' by looking for another defined symbol that differs
2284 only in the format of the symbol name (cdecl vs stdcall) and will
2285 resolve that symbol by linking to the match. For example, the
2286 undefined symbol @code{_foo} might be linked to the function
2287 @code{_foo@@12}, or the undefined symbol @code{_bar@@16} might be linked
2288 to the function @code{_bar}. When the linker does this, it prints a
2289 warning, since it normally should have failed to link, but sometimes
2290 import libraries generated from third-party dlls may need this feature
2291 to be usable. If you specify @option{--enable-stdcall-fixup}, this
2292 feature is fully enabled and warnings are not printed. If you specify
2293 @option{--disable-stdcall-fixup}, this feature is disabled and such
2294 mismatches are considered to be errors.
2295 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2296
2297 @kindex --leading-underscore
2298 @kindex --no-leading-underscore
2299 @item --leading-underscore
2300 @itemx --no-leading-underscore
2301 For most targets default symbol-prefix is an underscore and is defined
2302 in target's description. By this option it is possible to
2303 disable/enable the default underscore symbol-prefix.
2304
2305 @cindex DLLs, creating
2306 @kindex --export-all-symbols
2307 @item --export-all-symbols
2308 If given, all global symbols in the objects used to build a DLL will
2309 be exported by the DLL. Note that this is the default if there
2310 otherwise wouldn't be any exported symbols. When symbols are
2311 explicitly exported via DEF files or implicitly exported via function
2312 attributes, the default is to not export anything else unless this
2313 option is given. Note that the symbols @code{DllMain@@12},
2314 @code{DllEntryPoint@@0}, @code{DllMainCRTStartup@@12}, and
2315 @code{impure_ptr} will not be automatically
2316 exported. Also, symbols imported from other DLLs will not be
2317 re-exported, nor will symbols specifying the DLL's internal layout
2318 such as those beginning with @code{_head_} or ending with
2319 @code{_iname}. In addition, no symbols from @code{libgcc},
2320 @code{libstd++}, @code{libmingw32}, or @code{crtX.o} will be exported.
2321 Symbols whose names begin with @code{__rtti_} or @code{__builtin_} will
2322 not be exported, to help with C++ DLLs. Finally, there is an
2323 extensive list of cygwin-private symbols that are not exported
2324 (obviously, this applies on when building DLLs for cygwin targets).
2325 These cygwin-excludes are: @code{_cygwin_dll_entry@@12},
2326 @code{_cygwin_crt0_common@@8}, @code{_cygwin_noncygwin_dll_entry@@12},
2327 @code{_fmode}, @code{_impure_ptr}, @code{cygwin_attach_dll},
2328 @code{cygwin_premain0}, @code{cygwin_premain1}, @code{cygwin_premain2},
2329 @code{cygwin_premain3}, and @code{environ}.
2330 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2331
2332 @kindex --exclude-symbols
2333 @item --exclude-symbols @var{symbol},@var{symbol},...
2334 Specifies a list of symbols which should not be automatically
2335 exported. The symbol names may be delimited by commas or colons.
2336 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2337
2338 @kindex --exclude-all-symbols
2339 @item --exclude-all-symbols
2340 Specifies no symbols should be automatically exported.
2341 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2342
2343 @kindex --file-alignment
2344 @item --file-alignment
2345 Specify the file alignment. Sections in the file will always begin at
2346 file offsets which are multiples of this number. This defaults to
2347 512.
2348 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2349
2350 @cindex heap size
2351 @kindex --heap
2352 @item --heap @var{reserve}
2353 @itemx --heap @var{reserve},@var{commit}
2354 Specify the number of bytes of memory to reserve (and optionally commit)
2355 to be used as heap for this program. The default is 1MB reserved, 4K
2356 committed.
2357 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2358
2359 @cindex image base
2360 @kindex --image-base
2361 @item --image-base @var{value}
2362 Use @var{value} as the base address of your program or dll. This is
2363 the lowest memory location that will be used when your program or dll
2364 is loaded. To reduce the need to relocate and improve performance of
2365 your dlls, each should have a unique base address and not overlap any
2366 other dlls. The default is 0x400000 for executables, and 0x10000000
2367 for dlls.
2368 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2369
2370 @kindex --kill-at
2371 @item --kill-at
2372 If given, the stdcall suffixes (@@@var{nn}) will be stripped from
2373 symbols before they are exported.
2374 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2375
2376 @kindex --large-address-aware
2377 @item --large-address-aware
2378 If given, the appropriate bit in the ``Characteristics'' field of the COFF
2379 header is set to indicate that this executable supports virtual addresses
2380 greater than 2 gigabytes. This should be used in conjunction with the /3GB
2381 or /USERVA=@var{value} megabytes switch in the ``[operating systems]''
2382 section of the BOOT.INI. Otherwise, this bit has no effect.
2383 [This option is specific to PE targeted ports of the linker]
2384
2385 @kindex --disable-large-address-aware
2386 @item --disable-large-address-aware
2387 Reverts the effect of a previous @samp{--large-address-aware} option.
2388 This is useful if @samp{--large-address-aware} is always set by the compiler
2389 driver (e.g. Cygwin gcc) and the executable does not support virtual
2390 addresses greater than 2 gigabytes.
2391 [This option is specific to PE targeted ports of the linker]
2392
2393 @kindex --major-image-version
2394 @item --major-image-version @var{value}
2395 Sets the major number of the ``image version''. Defaults to 1.
2396 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2397
2398 @kindex --major-os-version
2399 @item --major-os-version @var{value}
2400 Sets the major number of the ``os version''. Defaults to 4.
2401 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2402
2403 @kindex --major-subsystem-version
2404 @item --major-subsystem-version @var{value}
2405 Sets the major number of the ``subsystem version''. Defaults to 4.
2406 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2407
2408 @kindex --minor-image-version
2409 @item --minor-image-version @var{value}
2410 Sets the minor number of the ``image version''. Defaults to 0.
2411 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2412
2413 @kindex --minor-os-version
2414 @item --minor-os-version @var{value}
2415 Sets the minor number of the ``os version''. Defaults to 0.
2416 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2417
2418 @kindex --minor-subsystem-version
2419 @item --minor-subsystem-version @var{value}
2420 Sets the minor number of the ``subsystem version''. Defaults to 0.
2421 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2422
2423 @cindex DEF files, creating
2424 @cindex DLLs, creating
2425 @kindex --output-def
2426 @item --output-def @var{file}
2427 The linker will create the file @var{file} which will contain a DEF
2428 file corresponding to the DLL the linker is generating. This DEF file
2429 (which should be called @code{*.def}) may be used to create an import
2430 library with @code{dlltool} or may be used as a reference to
2431 automatically or implicitly exported symbols.
2432 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2433
2434 @cindex DLLs, creating
2435 @kindex --out-implib
2436 @item --out-implib @var{file}
2437 The linker will create the file @var{file} which will contain an
2438 import lib corresponding to the DLL the linker is generating. This
2439 import lib (which should be called @code{*.dll.a} or @code{*.a}
2440 may be used to link clients against the generated DLL; this behaviour
2441 makes it possible to skip a separate @code{dlltool} import library
2442 creation step.
2443 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2444
2445 @kindex --enable-auto-image-base
2446 @item --enable-auto-image-base
2447 @itemx --enable-auto-image-base=@var{value}
2448 Automatically choose the image base for DLLs, optionally starting with base
2449 @var{value}, unless one is specified using the @code{--image-base} argument.
2450 By using a hash generated from the dllname to create unique image bases
2451 for each DLL, in-memory collisions and relocations which can delay program
2452 execution are avoided.
2453 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2454
2455 @kindex --disable-auto-image-base
2456 @item --disable-auto-image-base
2457 Do not automatically generate a unique image base. If there is no
2458 user-specified image base (@code{--image-base}) then use the platform
2459 default.
2460 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2461
2462 @cindex DLLs, linking to
2463 @kindex --dll-search-prefix
2464 @item --dll-search-prefix @var{string}
2465 When linking dynamically to a dll without an import library,
2466 search for @code{<string><basename>.dll} in preference to
2467 @code{lib<basename>.dll}. This behaviour allows easy distinction
2468 between DLLs built for the various "subplatforms": native, cygwin,
2469 uwin, pw, etc. For instance, cygwin DLLs typically use
2470 @code{--dll-search-prefix=cyg}.
2471 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2472
2473 @kindex --enable-auto-import
2474 @item --enable-auto-import
2475 Do sophisticated linking of @code{_symbol} to @code{__imp__symbol} for
2476 DATA imports from DLLs, and create the necessary thunking symbols when
2477 building the import libraries with those DATA exports. Note: Use of the
2478 'auto-import' extension will cause the text section of the image file
2479 to be made writable. This does not conform to the PE-COFF format
2480 specification published by Microsoft.
2481
2482 Note - use of the 'auto-import' extension will also cause read only
2483 data which would normally be placed into the .rdata section to be
2484 placed into the .data section instead. This is in order to work
2485 around a problem with consts that is described here:
2486 http://www.cygwin.com/ml/cygwin/2004-09/msg01101.html
2487
2488 Using 'auto-import' generally will 'just work' -- but sometimes you may
2489 see this message:
2490
2491 "variable '<var>' can't be auto-imported. Please read the
2492 documentation for ld's @code{--enable-auto-import} for details."
2493
2494 This message occurs when some (sub)expression accesses an address
2495 ultimately given by the sum of two constants (Win32 import tables only
2496 allow one). Instances where this may occur include accesses to member
2497 fields of struct variables imported from a DLL, as well as using a
2498 constant index into an array variable imported from a DLL. Any
2499 multiword variable (arrays, structs, long long, etc) may trigger
2500 this error condition. However, regardless of the exact data type
2501 of the offending exported variable, ld will always detect it, issue
2502 the warning, and exit.
2503
2504 There are several ways to address this difficulty, regardless of the
2505 data type of the exported variable:
2506
2507 One way is to use --enable-runtime-pseudo-reloc switch. This leaves the task
2508 of adjusting references in your client code for runtime environment, so
2509 this method works only when runtime environment supports this feature.
2510
2511 A second solution is to force one of the 'constants' to be a variable --
2512 that is, unknown and un-optimizable at compile time. For arrays,
2513 there are two possibilities: a) make the indexee (the array's address)
2514 a variable, or b) make the 'constant' index a variable. Thus:
2515
2516 @example
2517 extern type extern_array[];
2518 extern_array[1] -->
2519 @{ volatile type *t=extern_array; t[1] @}
2520 @end example
2521
2522 or
2523
2524 @example
2525 extern type extern_array[];
2526 extern_array[1] -->
2527 @{ volatile int t=1; extern_array[t] @}
2528 @end example
2529
2530 For structs (and most other multiword data types) the only option
2531 is to make the struct itself (or the long long, or the ...) variable:
2532
2533 @example
2534 extern struct s extern_struct;
2535 extern_struct.field -->
2536 @{ volatile struct s *t=&extern_struct; t->field @}
2537 @end example
2538
2539 or
2540
2541 @example
2542 extern long long extern_ll;
2543 extern_ll -->
2544 @{ volatile long long * local_ll=&extern_ll; *local_ll @}
2545 @end example
2546
2547 A third method of dealing with this difficulty is to abandon
2548 'auto-import' for the offending symbol and mark it with
2549 @code{__declspec(dllimport)}. However, in practice that
2550 requires using compile-time #defines to indicate whether you are
2551 building a DLL, building client code that will link to the DLL, or
2552 merely building/linking to a static library. In making the choice
2553 between the various methods of resolving the 'direct address with
2554 constant offset' problem, you should consider typical real-world usage:
2555
2556 Original:
2557 @example
2558 --foo.h
2559 extern int arr[];
2560 --foo.c
2561 #include "foo.h"
2562 void main(int argc, char **argv)@{
2563 printf("%d\n",arr[1]);
2564 @}
2565 @end example
2566
2567 Solution 1:
2568 @example
2569 --foo.h
2570 extern int arr[];
2571 --foo.c
2572 #include "foo.h"
2573 void main(int argc, char **argv)@{
2574 /* This workaround is for win32 and cygwin; do not "optimize" */
2575 volatile int *parr = arr;
2576 printf("%d\n",parr[1]);
2577 @}
2578 @end example
2579
2580 Solution 2:
2581 @example
2582 --foo.h
2583 /* Note: auto-export is assumed (no __declspec(dllexport)) */
2584 #if (defined(_WIN32) || defined(__CYGWIN__)) && \
2585 !(defined(FOO_BUILD_DLL) || defined(FOO_STATIC))
2586 #define FOO_IMPORT __declspec(dllimport)
2587 #else
2588 #define FOO_IMPORT
2589 #endif
2590 extern FOO_IMPORT int arr[];
2591 --foo.c
2592 #include "foo.h"
2593 void main(int argc, char **argv)@{
2594 printf("%d\n",arr[1]);
2595 @}
2596 @end example
2597
2598 A fourth way to avoid this problem is to re-code your
2599 library to use a functional interface rather than a data interface
2600 for the offending variables (e.g. set_foo() and get_foo() accessor
2601 functions).
2602 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2603
2604 @kindex --disable-auto-import
2605 @item --disable-auto-import
2606 Do not attempt to do sophisticated linking of @code{_symbol} to
2607 @code{__imp__symbol} for DATA imports from DLLs.
2608 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2609
2610 @kindex --enable-runtime-pseudo-reloc
2611 @item --enable-runtime-pseudo-reloc
2612 If your code contains expressions described in --enable-auto-import section,
2613 that is, DATA imports from DLL with non-zero offset, this switch will create
2614 a vector of 'runtime pseudo relocations' which can be used by runtime
2615 environment to adjust references to such data in your client code.
2616 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2617
2618 @kindex --disable-runtime-pseudo-reloc
2619 @item --disable-runtime-pseudo-reloc
2620 Do not create pseudo relocations for non-zero offset DATA imports from
2621 DLLs.
2622 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2623
2624 @kindex --enable-extra-pe-debug
2625 @item --enable-extra-pe-debug
2626 Show additional debug info related to auto-import symbol thunking.
2627 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2628
2629 @kindex --section-alignment
2630 @item --section-alignment
2631 Sets the section alignment. Sections in memory will always begin at
2632 addresses which are a multiple of this number. Defaults to 0x1000.
2633 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2634
2635 @cindex stack size
2636 @kindex --stack
2637 @item --stack @var{reserve}
2638 @itemx --stack @var{reserve},@var{commit}
2639 Specify the number of bytes of memory to reserve (and optionally commit)
2640 to be used as stack for this program. The default is 2MB reserved, 4K
2641 committed.
2642 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2643
2644 @kindex --subsystem
2645 @item --subsystem @var{which}
2646 @itemx --subsystem @var{which}:@var{major}
2647 @itemx --subsystem @var{which}:@var{major}.@var{minor}
2648 Specifies the subsystem under which your program will execute. The
2649 legal values for @var{which} are @code{native}, @code{windows},
2650 @code{console}, @code{posix}, and @code{xbox}. You may optionally set
2651 the subsystem version also. Numeric values are also accepted for
2652 @var{which}.
2653 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2654
2655 The following options set flags in the @code{DllCharacteristics} field
2656 of the PE file header:
2657 [These options are specific to PE targeted ports of the linker]
2658
2659 @kindex --high-entropy-va
2660 @item --high-entropy-va
2661 Image is compatible with 64-bit address space layout randomization
2662 (ASLR).
2663
2664 @kindex --dynamicbase
2665 @item --dynamicbase
2666 The image base address may be relocated using address space layout
2667 randomization (ASLR). This feature was introduced with MS Windows
2668 Vista for i386 PE targets.
2669
2670 @kindex --forceinteg
2671 @item --forceinteg
2672 Code integrity checks are enforced.
2673
2674 @kindex --nxcompat
2675 @item --nxcompat
2676 The image is compatible with the Data Execution Prevention.
2677 This feature was introduced with MS Windows XP SP2 for i386 PE targets.
2678
2679 @kindex --no-isolation
2680 @item --no-isolation
2681 Although the image understands isolation, do not isolate the image.
2682
2683 @kindex --no-seh
2684 @item --no-seh
2685 The image does not use SEH. No SE handler may be called from
2686 this image.
2687
2688 @kindex --no-bind
2689 @item --no-bind
2690 Do not bind this image.
2691
2692 @kindex --wdmdriver
2693 @item --wdmdriver
2694 The driver uses the MS Windows Driver Model.
2695
2696 @kindex --tsaware
2697 @item --tsaware
2698 The image is Terminal Server aware.
2699
2700 @kindex --insert-timestamp
2701 @item --insert-timestamp
2702 @itemx --no-insert-timestamp
2703 Insert a real timestamp into the image. This is the default behaviour
2704 as it matches legacy code and it means that the image will work with
2705 other, proprietary tools. The problem with this default is that it
2706 will result in slightly different images being produced each tiem the
2707 same sources are linked. The option @option{--no-insert-timestamp}
2708 can be used to insert a zero value for the timestamp, this ensuring
2709 that binaries produced from indentical sources will compare
2710 identically.
2711 @end table
2712
2713 @c man end
2714
2715 @ifset C6X
2716 @subsection Options specific to C6X uClinux targets
2717
2718 @c man begin OPTIONS
2719
2720 The C6X uClinux target uses a binary format called DSBT to support shared
2721 libraries. Each shared library in the system needs to have a unique index;
2722 all executables use an index of 0.
2723
2724 @table @gcctabopt
2725
2726 @kindex --dsbt-size
2727 @item --dsbt-size @var{size}
2728 This option sets the number of entires in the DSBT of the current executable
2729 or shared library to @var{size}. The default is to create a table with 64
2730 entries.
2731
2732 @kindex --dsbt-index
2733 @item --dsbt-index @var{index}
2734 This option sets the DSBT index of the current executable or shared library
2735 to @var{index}. The default is 0, which is appropriate for generating
2736 executables. If a shared library is generated with a DSBT index of 0, the
2737 @code{R_C6000_DSBT_INDEX} relocs are copied into the output file.
2738
2739 @kindex --no-merge-exidx-entries
2740 The @samp{--no-merge-exidx-entries} switch disables the merging of adjacent
2741 exidx entries in frame unwind info.
2742
2743 @end table
2744
2745 @c man end
2746 @end ifset
2747
2748 @ifset M68HC11
2749 @subsection Options specific to Motorola 68HC11 and 68HC12 targets
2750
2751 @c man begin OPTIONS
2752
2753 The 68HC11 and 68HC12 linkers support specific options to control the
2754 memory bank switching mapping and trampoline code generation.
2755
2756 @table @gcctabopt
2757
2758 @kindex --no-trampoline
2759 @item --no-trampoline
2760 This option disables the generation of trampoline. By default a trampoline
2761 is generated for each far function which is called using a @code{jsr}
2762 instruction (this happens when a pointer to a far function is taken).
2763
2764 @kindex --bank-window
2765 @item --bank-window @var{name}
2766 This option indicates to the linker the name of the memory region in
2767 the @samp{MEMORY} specification that describes the memory bank window.
2768 The definition of such region is then used by the linker to compute
2769 paging and addresses within the memory window.
2770
2771 @end table
2772
2773 @c man end
2774 @end ifset
2775
2776 @ifset M68K
2777 @subsection Options specific to Motorola 68K target
2778
2779 @c man begin OPTIONS
2780
2781 The following options are supported to control handling of GOT generation
2782 when linking for 68K targets.
2783
2784 @table @gcctabopt
2785
2786 @kindex --got
2787 @item --got=@var{type}
2788 This option tells the linker which GOT generation scheme to use.
2789 @var{type} should be one of @samp{single}, @samp{negative},
2790 @samp{multigot} or @samp{target}. For more information refer to the
2791 Info entry for @file{ld}.
2792
2793 @end table
2794
2795 @c man end
2796 @end ifset
2797
2798 @ifset MIPS
2799 @subsection Options specific to MIPS targets
2800
2801 @c man begin OPTIONS
2802
2803 The following options are supported to control microMIPS instruction
2804 generation when linking for MIPS targets.
2805
2806 @table @gcctabopt
2807
2808 @kindex --insn32
2809 @item --insn32
2810 @kindex --no-insn32
2811 @itemx --no-insn32
2812 These options control the choice of microMIPS instructions used in code
2813 generated by the linker, such as that in the PLT or lazy binding stubs,
2814 or in relaxation. If @samp{--insn32} is used, then the linker only uses
2815 32-bit instruction encodings. By default or if @samp{--no-insn32} is
2816 used, all instruction encodings are used, including 16-bit ones where
2817 possible.
2818
2819 @end table
2820
2821 @c man end
2822 @end ifset
2823
2824 @ifset UsesEnvVars
2825 @node Environment
2826 @section Environment Variables
2827
2828 @c man begin ENVIRONMENT
2829
2830 You can change the behaviour of @command{ld} with the environment variables
2831 @ifclear SingleFormat
2832 @code{GNUTARGET},
2833 @end ifclear
2834 @code{LDEMULATION} and @code{COLLECT_NO_DEMANGLE}.
2835
2836 @ifclear SingleFormat
2837 @kindex GNUTARGET
2838 @cindex default input format
2839 @code{GNUTARGET} determines the input-file object format if you don't
2840 use @samp{-b} (or its synonym @samp{--format}). Its value should be one
2841 of the BFD names for an input format (@pxref{BFD}). If there is no
2842 @code{GNUTARGET} in the environment, @command{ld} uses the natural format
2843 of the target. If @code{GNUTARGET} is set to @code{default} then BFD
2844 attempts to discover the input format by examining binary input files;
2845 this method often succeeds, but there are potential ambiguities, since
2846 there is no method of ensuring that the magic number used to specify
2847 object-file formats is unique. However, the configuration procedure for
2848 BFD on each system places the conventional format for that system first
2849 in the search-list, so ambiguities are resolved in favor of convention.
2850 @end ifclear
2851
2852 @kindex LDEMULATION
2853 @cindex default emulation
2854 @cindex emulation, default
2855 @code{LDEMULATION} determines the default emulation if you don't use the
2856 @samp{-m} option. The emulation can affect various aspects of linker
2857 behaviour, particularly the default linker script. You can list the
2858 available emulations with the @samp{--verbose} or @samp{-V} options. If
2859 the @samp{-m} option is not used, and the @code{LDEMULATION} environment
2860 variable is not defined, the default emulation depends upon how the
2861 linker was configured.
2862
2863 @kindex COLLECT_NO_DEMANGLE
2864 @cindex demangling, default
2865 Normally, the linker will default to demangling symbols. However, if
2866 @code{COLLECT_NO_DEMANGLE} is set in the environment, then it will
2867 default to not demangling symbols. This environment variable is used in
2868 a similar fashion by the @code{gcc} linker wrapper program. The default
2869 may be overridden by the @samp{--demangle} and @samp{--no-demangle}
2870 options.
2871
2872 @c man end
2873 @end ifset
2874
2875 @node Scripts
2876 @chapter Linker Scripts
2877
2878 @cindex scripts
2879 @cindex linker scripts
2880 @cindex command files
2881 Every link is controlled by a @dfn{linker script}. This script is
2882 written in the linker command language.
2883
2884 The main purpose of the linker script is to describe how the sections in
2885 the input files should be mapped into the output file, and to control
2886 the memory layout of the output file. Most linker scripts do nothing
2887 more than this. However, when necessary, the linker script can also
2888 direct the linker to perform many other operations, using the commands
2889 described below.
2890
2891 The linker always uses a linker script. If you do not supply one
2892 yourself, the linker will use a default script that is compiled into the
2893 linker executable. You can use the @samp{--verbose} command line option
2894 to display the default linker script. Certain command line options,
2895 such as @samp{-r} or @samp{-N}, will affect the default linker script.
2896
2897 You may supply your own linker script by using the @samp{-T} command
2898 line option. When you do this, your linker script will replace the
2899 default linker script.
2900
2901 You may also use linker scripts implicitly by naming them as input files
2902 to the linker, as though they were files to be linked. @xref{Implicit
2903 Linker Scripts}.
2904
2905 @menu
2906 * Basic Script Concepts:: Basic Linker Script Concepts
2907 * Script Format:: Linker Script Format
2908 * Simple Example:: Simple Linker Script Example
2909 * Simple Commands:: Simple Linker Script Commands
2910 * Assignments:: Assigning Values to Symbols
2911 * SECTIONS:: SECTIONS Command
2912 * MEMORY:: MEMORY Command
2913 * PHDRS:: PHDRS Command
2914 * VERSION:: VERSION Command
2915 * Expressions:: Expressions in Linker Scripts
2916 * Implicit Linker Scripts:: Implicit Linker Scripts
2917 @end menu
2918
2919 @node Basic Script Concepts
2920 @section Basic Linker Script Concepts
2921 @cindex linker script concepts
2922 We need to define some basic concepts and vocabulary in order to
2923 describe the linker script language.
2924
2925 The linker combines input files into a single output file. The output
2926 file and each input file are in a special data format known as an
2927 @dfn{object file format}. Each file is called an @dfn{object file}.
2928 The output file is often called an @dfn{executable}, but for our
2929 purposes we will also call it an object file. Each object file has,
2930 among other things, a list of @dfn{sections}. We sometimes refer to a
2931 section in an input file as an @dfn{input section}; similarly, a section
2932 in the output file is an @dfn{output section}.
2933
2934 Each section in an object file has a name and a size. Most sections
2935 also have an associated block of data, known as the @dfn{section
2936 contents}. A section may be marked as @dfn{loadable}, which means that
2937 the contents should be loaded into memory when the output file is run.
2938 A section with no contents may be @dfn{allocatable}, which means that an
2939 area in memory should be set aside, but nothing in particular should be
2940 loaded there (in some cases this memory must be zeroed out). A section
2941 which is neither loadable nor allocatable typically contains some sort
2942 of debugging information.
2943
2944 Every loadable or allocatable output section has two addresses. The
2945 first is the @dfn{VMA}, or virtual memory address. This is the address
2946 the section will have when the output file is run. The second is the
2947 @dfn{LMA}, or load memory address. This is the address at which the
2948 section will be loaded. In most cases the two addresses will be the
2949 same. An example of when they might be different is when a data section
2950 is loaded into ROM, and then copied into RAM when the program starts up
2951 (this technique is often used to initialize global variables in a ROM
2952 based system). In this case the ROM address would be the LMA, and the
2953 RAM address would be the VMA.
2954
2955 You can see the sections in an object file by using the @code{objdump}
2956 program with the @samp{-h} option.
2957
2958 Every object file also has a list of @dfn{symbols}, known as the
2959 @dfn{symbol table}. A symbol may be defined or undefined. Each symbol
2960 has a name, and each defined symbol has an address, among other
2961 information. If you compile a C or C++ program into an object file, you
2962 will get a defined symbol for every defined function and global or
2963 static variable. Every undefined function or global variable which is
2964 referenced in the input file will become an undefined symbol.
2965
2966 You can see the symbols in an object file by using the @code{nm}
2967 program, or by using the @code{objdump} program with the @samp{-t}
2968 option.
2969
2970 @node Script Format
2971 @section Linker Script Format
2972 @cindex linker script format
2973 Linker scripts are text files.
2974
2975 You write a linker script as a series of commands. Each command is
2976 either a keyword, possibly followed by arguments, or an assignment to a
2977 symbol. You may separate commands using semicolons. Whitespace is
2978 generally ignored.
2979
2980 Strings such as file or format names can normally be entered directly.
2981 If the file name contains a character such as a comma which would
2982 otherwise serve to separate file names, you may put the file name in
2983 double quotes. There is no way to use a double quote character in a
2984 file name.
2985
2986 You may include comments in linker scripts just as in C, delimited by
2987 @samp{/*} and @samp{*/}. As in C, comments are syntactically equivalent
2988 to whitespace.
2989
2990 @node Simple Example
2991 @section Simple Linker Script Example
2992 @cindex linker script example
2993 @cindex example of linker script
2994 Many linker scripts are fairly simple.
2995
2996 The simplest possible linker script has just one command:
2997 @samp{SECTIONS}. You use the @samp{SECTIONS} command to describe the
2998 memory layout of the output file.
2999
3000 The @samp{SECTIONS} command is a powerful command. Here we will
3001 describe a simple use of it. Let's assume your program consists only of
3002 code, initialized data, and uninitialized data. These will be in the
3003 @samp{.text}, @samp{.data}, and @samp{.bss} sections, respectively.
3004 Let's assume further that these are the only sections which appear in
3005 your input files.
3006
3007 For this example, let's say that the code should be loaded at address
3008 0x10000, and that the data should start at address 0x8000000. Here is a
3009 linker script which will do that:
3010 @smallexample
3011 SECTIONS
3012 @{
3013 . = 0x10000;
3014 .text : @{ *(.text) @}
3015 . = 0x8000000;
3016 .data : @{ *(.data) @}
3017 .bss : @{ *(.bss) @}
3018 @}
3019 @end smallexample
3020
3021 You write the @samp{SECTIONS} command as the keyword @samp{SECTIONS},
3022 followed by a series of symbol assignments and output section
3023 descriptions enclosed in curly braces.
3024
3025 The first line inside the @samp{SECTIONS} command of the above example
3026 sets the value of the special symbol @samp{.}, which is the location
3027 counter. If you do not specify the address of an output section in some
3028 other way (other ways are described later), the address is set from the
3029 current value of the location counter. The location counter is then
3030 incremented by the size of the output section. At the start of the
3031 @samp{SECTIONS} command, the location counter has the value @samp{0}.
3032
3033 The second line defines an output section, @samp{.text}. The colon is
3034 required syntax which may be ignored for now. Within the curly braces
3035 after the output section name, you list the names of the input sections
3036 which should be placed into this output section. The @samp{*} is a
3037 wildcard which matches any file name. The expression @samp{*(.text)}
3038 means all @samp{.text} input sections in all input files.
3039
3040 Since the location counter is @samp{0x10000} when the output section
3041 @samp{.text} is defined, the linker will set the address of the
3042 @samp{.text} section in the output file to be @samp{0x10000}.
3043
3044 The remaining lines define the @samp{.data} and @samp{.bss} sections in
3045 the output file. The linker will place the @samp{.data} output section
3046 at address @samp{0x8000000}. After the linker places the @samp{.data}
3047 output section, the value of the location counter will be
3048 @samp{0x8000000} plus the size of the @samp{.data} output section. The
3049 effect is that the linker will place the @samp{.bss} output section
3050 immediately after the @samp{.data} output section in memory.
3051
3052 The linker will ensure that each output section has the required
3053 alignment, by increasing the location counter if necessary. In this
3054 example, the specified addresses for the @samp{.text} and @samp{.data}
3055 sections will probably satisfy any alignment constraints, but the linker
3056 may have to create a small gap between the @samp{.data} and @samp{.bss}
3057 sections.
3058
3059 That's it! That's a simple and complete linker script.
3060
3061 @node Simple Commands
3062 @section Simple Linker Script Commands
3063 @cindex linker script simple commands
3064 In this section we describe the simple linker script commands.
3065
3066 @menu
3067 * Entry Point:: Setting the entry point
3068 * File Commands:: Commands dealing with files
3069 @ifclear SingleFormat
3070 * Format Commands:: Commands dealing with object file formats
3071 @end ifclear
3072
3073 * REGION_ALIAS:: Assign alias names to memory regions
3074 * Miscellaneous Commands:: Other linker script commands
3075 @end menu
3076
3077 @node Entry Point
3078 @subsection Setting the Entry Point
3079 @kindex ENTRY(@var{symbol})
3080 @cindex start of execution
3081 @cindex first instruction
3082 @cindex entry point
3083 The first instruction to execute in a program is called the @dfn{entry
3084 point}. You can use the @code{ENTRY} linker script command to set the
3085 entry point. The argument is a symbol name:
3086 @smallexample
3087 ENTRY(@var{symbol})
3088 @end smallexample
3089
3090 There are several ways to set the entry point. The linker will set the
3091 entry point by trying each of the following methods in order, and
3092 stopping when one of them succeeds:
3093 @itemize @bullet
3094 @item
3095 the @samp{-e} @var{entry} command-line option;
3096 @item
3097 the @code{ENTRY(@var{symbol})} command in a linker script;
3098 @item
3099 the value of a target specific symbol, if it is defined; For many
3100 targets this is @code{start}, but PE and BeOS based systems for example
3101 check a list of possible entry symbols, matching the first one found.
3102 @item
3103 the address of the first byte of the @samp{.text} section, if present;
3104 @item
3105 The address @code{0}.
3106 @end itemize
3107
3108 @node File Commands
3109 @subsection Commands Dealing with Files
3110 @cindex linker script file commands
3111 Several linker script commands deal with files.
3112
3113 @table @code
3114 @item INCLUDE @var{filename}
3115 @kindex INCLUDE @var{filename}
3116 @cindex including a linker script
3117 Include the linker script @var{filename} at this point. The file will
3118 be searched for in the current directory, and in any directory specified
3119 with the @option{-L} option. You can nest calls to @code{INCLUDE} up to
3120 10 levels deep.
3121
3122 You can place @code{INCLUDE} directives at the top level, in @code{MEMORY} or
3123 @code{SECTIONS} commands, or in output section descriptions.
3124
3125 @item INPUT(@var{file}, @var{file}, @dots{})
3126 @itemx INPUT(@var{file} @var{file} @dots{})
3127 @kindex INPUT(@var{files})
3128 @cindex input files in linker scripts
3129 @cindex input object files in linker scripts
3130 @cindex linker script input object files
3131 The @code{INPUT} command directs the linker to include the named files
3132 in the link, as though they were named on the command line.
3133
3134 For example, if you always want to include @file{subr.o} any time you do
3135 a link, but you can't be bothered to put it on every link command line,
3136 then you can put @samp{INPUT (subr.o)} in your linker script.
3137
3138 In fact, if you like, you can list all of your input files in the linker
3139 script, and then invoke the linker with nothing but a @samp{-T} option.
3140
3141 In case a @dfn{sysroot prefix} is configured, and the filename starts
3142 with the @samp{/} character, and the script being processed was
3143 located inside the @dfn{sysroot prefix}, the filename will be looked
3144 for in the @dfn{sysroot prefix}. Otherwise, the linker will try to
3145 open the file in the current directory. If it is not found, the
3146 linker will search through the archive library search path. See the
3147 description of @samp{-L} in @ref{Options,,Command Line Options}.
3148
3149 If you use @samp{INPUT (-l@var{file})}, @command{ld} will transform the
3150 name to @code{lib@var{file}.a}, as with the command line argument
3151 @samp{-l}.
3152
3153 When you use the @code{INPUT} command in an implicit linker script, the
3154 files will be included in the link at the point at which the linker
3155 script file is included. This can affect archive searching.
3156
3157 @item GROUP(@var{file}, @var{file}, @dots{})
3158 @itemx GROUP(@var{file} @var{file} @dots{})
3159 @kindex GROUP(@var{files})
3160 @cindex grouping input files
3161 The @code{GROUP} command is like @code{INPUT}, except that the named
3162 files should all be archives, and they are searched repeatedly until no
3163 new undefined references are created. See the description of @samp{-(}
3164 in @ref{Options,,Command Line Options}.
3165
3166 @item AS_NEEDED(@var{file}, @var{file}, @dots{})
3167 @itemx AS_NEEDED(@var{file} @var{file} @dots{})
3168 @kindex AS_NEEDED(@var{files})
3169 This construct can appear only inside of the @code{INPUT} or @code{GROUP}
3170 commands, among other filenames. The files listed will be handled
3171 as if they appear directly in the @code{INPUT} or @code{GROUP} commands,
3172 with the exception of ELF shared libraries, that will be added only
3173 when they are actually needed. This construct essentially enables
3174 @option{--as-needed} option for all the files listed inside of it
3175 and restores previous @option{--as-needed} resp. @option{--no-as-needed}
3176 setting afterwards.
3177
3178 @item OUTPUT(@var{filename})
3179 @kindex OUTPUT(@var{filename})
3180 @cindex output file name in linker script
3181 The @code{OUTPUT} command names the output file. Using
3182 @code{OUTPUT(@var{filename})} in the linker script is exactly like using
3183 @samp{-o @var{filename}} on the command line (@pxref{Options,,Command
3184 Line Options}). If both are used, the command line option takes
3185 precedence.
3186
3187 You can use the @code{OUTPUT} command to define a default name for the
3188 output file other than the usual default of @file{a.out}.
3189
3190 @item SEARCH_DIR(@var{path})
3191 @kindex SEARCH_DIR(@var{path})
3192 @cindex library search path in linker script
3193 @cindex archive search path in linker script
3194 @cindex search path in linker script
3195 The @code{SEARCH_DIR} command adds @var{path} to the list of paths where
3196 @command{ld} looks for archive libraries. Using
3197 @code{SEARCH_DIR(@var{path})} is exactly like using @samp{-L @var{path}}
3198 on the command line (@pxref{Options,,Command Line Options}). If both
3199 are used, then the linker will search both paths. Paths specified using
3200 the command line option are searched first.
3201
3202 @item STARTUP(@var{filename})
3203 @kindex STARTUP(@var{filename})
3204 @cindex first input file
3205 The @code{STARTUP} command is just like the @code{INPUT} command, except
3206 that @var{filename} will become the first input file to be linked, as
3207 though it were specified first on the command line. This may be useful
3208 when using a system in which the entry point is always the start of the
3209 first file.
3210 @end table
3211
3212 @ifclear SingleFormat
3213 @node Format Commands
3214 @subsection Commands Dealing with Object File Formats
3215 A couple of linker script commands deal with object file formats.
3216
3217 @table @code
3218 @item OUTPUT_FORMAT(@var{bfdname})
3219 @itemx OUTPUT_FORMAT(@var{default}, @var{big}, @var{little})
3220 @kindex OUTPUT_FORMAT(@var{bfdname})
3221 @cindex output file format in linker script
3222 The @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} command names the BFD format to use for the
3223 output file (@pxref{BFD}). Using @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT(@var{bfdname})} is
3224 exactly like using @samp{--oformat @var{bfdname}} on the command line
3225 (@pxref{Options,,Command Line Options}). If both are used, the command
3226 line option takes precedence.
3227
3228 You can use @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} with three arguments to use different
3229 formats based on the @samp{-EB} and @samp{-EL} command line options.
3230 This permits the linker script to set the output format based on the
3231 desired endianness.
3232
3233 If neither @samp{-EB} nor @samp{-EL} are used, then the output format
3234 will be the first argument, @var{default}. If @samp{-EB} is used, the
3235 output format will be the second argument, @var{big}. If @samp{-EL} is
3236 used, the output format will be the third argument, @var{little}.
3237
3238 For example, the default linker script for the MIPS ELF target uses this
3239 command:
3240 @smallexample
3241 OUTPUT_FORMAT(elf32-bigmips, elf32-bigmips, elf32-littlemips)
3242 @end smallexample
3243 This says that the default format for the output file is
3244 @samp{elf32-bigmips}, but if the user uses the @samp{-EL} command line
3245 option, the output file will be created in the @samp{elf32-littlemips}
3246 format.
3247
3248 @item TARGET(@var{bfdname})
3249 @kindex TARGET(@var{bfdname})
3250 @cindex input file format in linker script
3251 The @code{TARGET} command names the BFD format to use when reading input
3252 files. It affects subsequent @code{INPUT} and @code{GROUP} commands.
3253 This command is like using @samp{-b @var{bfdname}} on the command line
3254 (@pxref{Options,,Command Line Options}). If the @code{TARGET} command
3255 is used but @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} is not, then the last @code{TARGET}
3256 command is also used to set the format for the output file. @xref{BFD}.
3257 @end table
3258 @end ifclear
3259
3260 @node REGION_ALIAS
3261 @subsection Assign alias names to memory regions
3262 @kindex REGION_ALIAS(@var{alias}, @var{region})
3263 @cindex region alias
3264 @cindex region names
3265
3266 Alias names can be added to existing memory regions created with the
3267 @ref{MEMORY} command. Each name corresponds to at most one memory region.
3268
3269 @smallexample
3270 REGION_ALIAS(@var{alias}, @var{region})
3271 @end smallexample
3272
3273 The @code{REGION_ALIAS} function creates an alias name @var{alias} for the
3274 memory region @var{region}. This allows a flexible mapping of output sections
3275 to memory regions. An example follows.
3276
3277 Suppose we have an application for embedded systems which come with various
3278 memory storage devices. All have a general purpose, volatile memory @code{RAM}
3279 that allows code execution or data storage. Some may have a read-only,
3280 non-volatile memory @code{ROM} that allows code execution and read-only data
3281 access. The last variant is a read-only, non-volatile memory @code{ROM2} with
3282 read-only data access and no code execution capability. We have four output
3283 sections:
3284
3285 @itemize @bullet
3286 @item
3287 @code{.text} program code;
3288 @item
3289 @code{.rodata} read-only data;
3290 @item
3291 @code{.data} read-write initialized data;
3292 @item
3293 @code{.bss} read-write zero initialized data.
3294 @end itemize
3295
3296 The goal is to provide a linker command file that contains a system independent
3297 part defining the output sections and a system dependent part mapping the
3298 output sections to the memory regions available on the system. Our embedded
3299 systems come with three different memory setups @code{A}, @code{B} and
3300 @code{C}:
3301 @multitable @columnfractions .25 .25 .25 .25
3302 @item Section @tab Variant A @tab Variant B @tab Variant C
3303 @item .text @tab RAM @tab ROM @tab ROM
3304 @item .rodata @tab RAM @tab ROM @tab ROM2
3305 @item .data @tab RAM @tab RAM/ROM @tab RAM/ROM2
3306 @item .bss @tab RAM @tab RAM @tab RAM
3307 @end multitable
3308 The notation @code{RAM/ROM} or @code{RAM/ROM2} means that this section is
3309 loaded into region @code{ROM} or @code{ROM2} respectively. Please note that
3310 the load address of the @code{.data} section starts in all three variants at
3311 the end of the @code{.rodata} section.
3312
3313 The base linker script that deals with the output sections follows. It
3314 includes the system dependent @code{linkcmds.memory} file that describes the
3315 memory layout:
3316 @smallexample
3317 INCLUDE linkcmds.memory
3318
3319 SECTIONS
3320 @{
3321 .text :
3322 @{
3323 *(.text)
3324 @} > REGION_TEXT
3325 .rodata :
3326 @{
3327 *(.rodata)
3328 rodata_end = .;
3329 @} > REGION_RODATA
3330 .data : AT (rodata_end)
3331 @{
3332 data_start = .;
3333 *(.data)
3334 @} > REGION_DATA
3335 data_size = SIZEOF(.data);
3336 data_load_start = LOADADDR(.data);
3337 .bss :
3338 @{
3339 *(.bss)
3340 @} > REGION_BSS
3341 @}
3342 @end smallexample
3343
3344 Now we need three different @code{linkcmds.memory} files to define memory
3345 regions and alias names. The content of @code{linkcmds.memory} for the three
3346 variants @code{A}, @code{B} and @code{C}:
3347 @table @code
3348 @item A
3349 Here everything goes into the @code{RAM}.
3350 @smallexample
3351 MEMORY
3352 @{
3353 RAM : ORIGIN = 0, LENGTH = 4M
3354 @}
3355
3356 REGION_ALIAS("REGION_TEXT", RAM);
3357 REGION_ALIAS("REGION_RODATA", RAM);
3358 REGION_ALIAS("REGION_DATA", RAM);
3359 REGION_ALIAS("REGION_BSS", RAM);
3360 @end smallexample
3361 @item B
3362 Program code and read-only data go into the @code{ROM}. Read-write data goes
3363 into the @code{RAM}. An image of the initialized data is loaded into the
3364 @code{ROM} and will be copied during system start into the @code{RAM}.
3365 @smallexample
3366 MEMORY
3367 @{
3368 ROM : ORIGIN = 0, LENGTH = 3M
3369 RAM : ORIGIN = 0x10000000, LENGTH = 1M
3370 @}
3371
3372 REGION_ALIAS("REGION_TEXT", ROM);
3373 REGION_ALIAS("REGION_RODATA", ROM);
3374 REGION_ALIAS("REGION_DATA", RAM);
3375 REGION_ALIAS("REGION_BSS", RAM);
3376 @end smallexample
3377 @item C
3378 Program code goes into the @code{ROM}. Read-only data goes into the
3379 @code{ROM2}. Read-write data goes into the @code{RAM}. An image of the
3380 initialized data is loaded into the @code{ROM2} and will be copied during
3381 system start into the @code{RAM}.
3382 @smallexample
3383 MEMORY
3384 @{
3385 ROM : ORIGIN = 0, LENGTH = 2M
3386 ROM2 : ORIGIN = 0x10000000, LENGTH = 1M
3387 RAM : ORIGIN = 0x20000000, LENGTH = 1M
3388 @}
3389
3390 REGION_ALIAS("REGION_TEXT", ROM);
3391 REGION_ALIAS("REGION_RODATA", ROM2);
3392 REGION_ALIAS("REGION_DATA", RAM);
3393 REGION_ALIAS("REGION_BSS", RAM);
3394 @end smallexample
3395 @end table
3396
3397 It is possible to write a common system initialization routine to copy the
3398 @code{.data} section from @code{ROM} or @code{ROM2} into the @code{RAM} if
3399 necessary:
3400 @smallexample
3401 #include <string.h>
3402
3403 extern char data_start [];
3404 extern char data_size [];
3405 extern char data_load_start [];
3406
3407 void copy_data(void)
3408 @{
3409 if (data_start != data_load_start)
3410 @{
3411 memcpy(data_start, data_load_start, (size_t) data_size);
3412 @}
3413 @}
3414 @end smallexample
3415
3416 @node Miscellaneous Commands
3417 @subsection Other Linker Script Commands
3418 There are a few other linker scripts commands.
3419
3420 @table @code
3421 @item ASSERT(@var{exp}, @var{message})
3422 @kindex ASSERT
3423 @cindex assertion in linker script
3424 Ensure that @var{exp} is non-zero. If it is zero, then exit the linker
3425 with an error code, and print @var{message}.
3426
3427 @item EXTERN(@var{symbol} @var{symbol} @dots{})
3428 @kindex EXTERN
3429 @cindex undefined symbol in linker script
3430 Force @var{symbol} to be entered in the output file as an undefined
3431 symbol. Doing this may, for example, trigger linking of additional
3432 modules from standard libraries. You may list several @var{symbol}s for
3433 each @code{EXTERN}, and you may use @code{EXTERN} multiple times. This
3434 command has the same effect as the @samp{-u} command-line option.
3435
3436 @item FORCE_COMMON_ALLOCATION
3437 @kindex FORCE_COMMON_ALLOCATION
3438 @cindex common allocation in linker script
3439 This command has the same effect as the @samp{-d} command-line option:
3440 to make @command{ld} assign space to common symbols even if a relocatable
3441 output file is specified (@samp{-r}).
3442
3443 @item INHIBIT_COMMON_ALLOCATION
3444 @kindex INHIBIT_COMMON_ALLOCATION
3445 @cindex common allocation in linker script
3446 This command has the same effect as the @samp{--no-define-common}
3447 command-line option: to make @code{ld} omit the assignment of addresses
3448 to common symbols even for a non-relocatable output file.
3449
3450 @item INSERT [ AFTER | BEFORE ] @var{output_section}
3451 @kindex INSERT
3452 @cindex insert user script into default script
3453 This command is typically used in a script specified by @samp{-T} to
3454 augment the default @code{SECTIONS} with, for example, overlays. It
3455 inserts all prior linker script statements after (or before)
3456 @var{output_section}, and also causes @samp{-T} to not override the
3457 default linker script. The exact insertion point is as for orphan
3458 sections. @xref{Location Counter}. The insertion happens after the
3459 linker has mapped input sections to output sections. Prior to the
3460 insertion, since @samp{-T} scripts are parsed before the default
3461 linker script, statements in the @samp{-T} script occur before the
3462 default linker script statements in the internal linker representation
3463 of the script. In particular, input section assignments will be made
3464 to @samp{-T} output sections before those in the default script. Here
3465 is an example of how a @samp{-T} script using @code{INSERT} might look:
3466
3467 @smallexample
3468 SECTIONS
3469 @{
3470 OVERLAY :
3471 @{
3472 .ov1 @{ ov1*(.text) @}
3473 .ov2 @{ ov2*(.text) @}
3474 @}
3475 @}
3476 INSERT AFTER .text;
3477 @end smallexample
3478
3479 @item NOCROSSREFS(@var{section} @var{section} @dots{})
3480 @kindex NOCROSSREFS(@var{sections})
3481 @cindex cross references
3482 This command may be used to tell @command{ld} to issue an error about any
3483 references among certain output sections.
3484
3485 In certain types of programs, particularly on embedded systems when
3486 using overlays, when one section is loaded into memory, another section
3487 will not be. Any direct references between the two sections would be
3488 errors. For example, it would be an error if code in one section called
3489 a function defined in the other section.
3490
3491 The @code{NOCROSSREFS} command takes a list of output section names. If
3492 @command{ld} detects any cross references between the sections, it reports
3493 an error and returns a non-zero exit status. Note that the
3494 @code{NOCROSSREFS} command uses output section names, not input section
3495 names.
3496
3497 @ifclear SingleFormat
3498 @item OUTPUT_ARCH(@var{bfdarch})
3499 @kindex OUTPUT_ARCH(@var{bfdarch})
3500 @cindex machine architecture
3501 @cindex architecture
3502 Specify a particular output machine architecture. The argument is one
3503 of the names used by the BFD library (@pxref{BFD}). You can see the
3504 architecture of an object file by using the @code{objdump} program with
3505 the @samp{-f} option.
3506 @end ifclear
3507
3508 @item LD_FEATURE(@var{string})
3509 @kindex LD_FEATURE(@var{string})
3510 This command may be used to modify @command{ld} behavior. If
3511 @var{string} is @code{"SANE_EXPR"} then absolute symbols and numbers
3512 in a script are simply treated as numbers everywhere.
3513 @xref{Expression Section}.
3514 @end table
3515
3516 @node Assignments
3517 @section Assigning Values to Symbols
3518 @cindex assignment in scripts
3519 @cindex symbol definition, scripts
3520 @cindex variables, defining
3521 You may assign a value to a symbol in a linker script. This will define
3522 the symbol and place it into the symbol table with a global scope.
3523
3524 @menu
3525 * Simple Assignments:: Simple Assignments
3526 * HIDDEN:: HIDDEN
3527 * PROVIDE:: PROVIDE
3528 * PROVIDE_HIDDEN:: PROVIDE_HIDDEN
3529 * Source Code Reference:: How to use a linker script defined symbol in source code
3530 @end menu
3531
3532 @node Simple Assignments
3533 @subsection Simple Assignments
3534
3535 You may assign to a symbol using any of the C assignment operators:
3536
3537 @table @code
3538 @item @var{symbol} = @var{expression} ;
3539 @itemx @var{symbol} += @var{expression} ;
3540 @itemx @var{symbol} -= @var{expression} ;
3541 @itemx @var{symbol} *= @var{expression} ;
3542 @itemx @var{symbol} /= @var{expression} ;
3543 @itemx @var{symbol} <<= @var{expression} ;
3544 @itemx @var{symbol} >>= @var{expression} ;
3545 @itemx @var{symbol} &= @var{expression} ;
3546 @itemx @var{symbol} |= @var{expression} ;
3547 @end table
3548
3549 The first case will define @var{symbol} to the value of
3550 @var{expression}. In the other cases, @var{symbol} must already be
3551 defined, and the value will be adjusted accordingly.
3552
3553 The special symbol name @samp{.} indicates the location counter. You
3554 may only use this within a @code{SECTIONS} command. @xref{Location Counter}.
3555
3556 The semicolon after @var{expression} is required.
3557
3558 Expressions are defined below; see @ref{Expressions}.
3559
3560 You may write symbol assignments as commands in their own right, or as
3561 statements within a @code{SECTIONS} command, or as part of an output
3562 section description in a @code{SECTIONS} command.
3563
3564 The section of the symbol will be set from the section of the
3565 expression; for more information, see @ref{Expression Section}.
3566
3567 Here is an example showing the three different places that symbol
3568 assignments may be used:
3569
3570 @smallexample
3571 floating_point = 0;
3572 SECTIONS
3573 @{
3574 .text :
3575 @{
3576 *(.text)
3577 _etext = .;
3578 @}
3579 _bdata = (. + 3) & ~ 3;
3580 .data : @{ *(.data) @}
3581 @}
3582 @end smallexample
3583 @noindent
3584 In this example, the symbol @samp{floating_point} will be defined as
3585 zero. The symbol @samp{_etext} will be defined as the address following
3586 the last @samp{.text} input section. The symbol @samp{_bdata} will be
3587 defined as the address following the @samp{.text} output section aligned
3588 upward to a 4 byte boundary.
3589
3590 @node HIDDEN
3591 @subsection HIDDEN
3592 @cindex HIDDEN
3593 For ELF targeted ports, define a symbol that will be hidden and won't be
3594 exported. The syntax is @code{HIDDEN(@var{symbol} = @var{expression})}.
3595
3596 Here is the example from @ref{Simple Assignments}, rewritten to use
3597 @code{HIDDEN}:
3598
3599 @smallexample
3600 HIDDEN(floating_point = 0);
3601 SECTIONS
3602 @{
3603 .text :
3604 @{
3605 *(.text)
3606 HIDDEN(_etext = .);
3607 @}
3608 HIDDEN(_bdata = (. + 3) & ~ 3);
3609 .data : @{ *(.data) @}
3610 @}
3611 @end smallexample
3612 @noindent
3613 In this case none of the three symbols will be visible outside this module.
3614
3615 @node PROVIDE
3616 @subsection PROVIDE
3617 @cindex PROVIDE
3618 In some cases, it is desirable for a linker script to define a symbol
3619 only if it is referenced and is not defined by any object included in
3620 the link. For example, traditional linkers defined the symbol
3621 @samp{etext}. However, ANSI C requires that the user be able to use
3622 @samp{etext} as a function name without encountering an error. The
3623 @code{PROVIDE} keyword may be used to define a symbol, such as
3624 @samp{etext}, only if it is referenced but not defined. The syntax is
3625 @code{PROVIDE(@var{symbol} = @var{expression})}.
3626
3627 Here is an example of using @code{PROVIDE} to define @samp{etext}:
3628 @smallexample
3629 SECTIONS
3630 @{
3631 .text :
3632 @{
3633 *(.text)
3634 _etext = .;
3635 PROVIDE(etext = .);
3636 @}
3637 @}
3638 @end smallexample
3639
3640 In this example, if the program defines @samp{_etext} (with a leading
3641 underscore), the linker will give a multiple definition error. If, on
3642 the other hand, the program defines @samp{etext} (with no leading
3643 underscore), the linker will silently use the definition in the program.
3644 If the program references @samp{etext} but does not define it, the
3645 linker will use the definition in the linker script.
3646
3647 @node PROVIDE_HIDDEN
3648 @subsection PROVIDE_HIDDEN
3649 @cindex PROVIDE_HIDDEN
3650 Similar to @code{PROVIDE}. For ELF targeted ports, the symbol will be
3651 hidden and won't be exported.
3652
3653 @node Source Code Reference
3654 @subsection Source Code Reference
3655
3656 Accessing a linker script defined variable from source code is not
3657 intuitive. In particular a linker script symbol is not equivalent to
3658 a variable declaration in a high level language, it is instead a
3659 symbol that does not have a value.
3660
3661 Before going further, it is important to note that compilers often
3662 transform names in the source code into different names when they are
3663 stored in the symbol table. For example, Fortran compilers commonly
3664 prepend or append an underscore, and C++ performs extensive @samp{name
3665 mangling}. Therefore there might be a discrepancy between the name
3666 of a variable as it is used in source code and the name of the same
3667 variable as it is defined in a linker script. For example in C a
3668 linker script variable might be referred to as:
3669
3670 @smallexample
3671 extern int foo;
3672 @end smallexample
3673
3674 But in the linker script it might be defined as:
3675
3676 @smallexample
3677 _foo = 1000;
3678 @end smallexample
3679
3680 In the remaining examples however it is assumed that no name
3681 transformation has taken place.
3682
3683 When a symbol is declared in a high level language such as C, two
3684 things happen. The first is that the compiler reserves enough space
3685 in the program's memory to hold the @emph{value} of the symbol. The
3686 second is that the compiler creates an entry in the program's symbol
3687 table which holds the symbol's @emph{address}. ie the symbol table
3688 contains the address of the block of memory holding the symbol's
3689 value. So for example the following C declaration, at file scope:
3690
3691 @smallexample
3692 int foo = 1000;
3693 @end smallexample
3694
3695 creates an entry called @samp{foo} in the symbol table. This entry
3696 holds the address of an @samp{int} sized block of memory where the
3697 number 1000 is initially stored.
3698
3699 When a program references a symbol the compiler generates code that
3700 first accesses the symbol table to find the address of the symbol's
3701 memory block and then code to read the value from that memory block.
3702 So:
3703
3704 @smallexample
3705 foo = 1;
3706 @end smallexample
3707
3708 looks up the symbol @samp{foo} in the symbol table, gets the address
3709 associated with this symbol and then writes the value 1 into that
3710 address. Whereas:
3711
3712 @smallexample
3713 int * a = & foo;
3714 @end smallexample
3715
3716 looks up the symbol @samp{foo} in the symbol table, gets its address
3717 and then copies this address into the block of memory associated with
3718 the variable @samp{a}.
3719
3720 Linker scripts symbol declarations, by contrast, create an entry in
3721 the symbol table but do not assign any memory to them. Thus they are
3722 an address without a value. So for example the linker script definition:
3723
3724 @smallexample
3725 foo = 1000;
3726 @end smallexample
3727
3728 creates an entry in the symbol table called @samp{foo} which holds
3729 the address of memory location 1000, but nothing special is stored at
3730 address 1000. This means that you cannot access the @emph{value} of a
3731 linker script defined symbol - it has no value - all you can do is
3732 access the @emph{address} of a linker script defined symbol.
3733
3734 Hence when you are using a linker script defined symbol in source code
3735 you should always take the address of the symbol, and never attempt to
3736 use its value. For example suppose you want to copy the contents of a
3737 section of memory called .ROM into a section called .FLASH and the
3738 linker script contains these declarations:
3739
3740 @smallexample
3741 @group
3742 start_of_ROM = .ROM;
3743 end_of_ROM = .ROM + sizeof (.ROM) - 1;
3744 start_of_FLASH = .FLASH;
3745 @end group
3746 @end smallexample
3747
3748 Then the C source code to perform the copy would be:
3749
3750 @smallexample
3751 @group
3752 extern char start_of_ROM, end_of_ROM, start_of_FLASH;
3753
3754 memcpy (& start_of_FLASH, & start_of_ROM, & end_of_ROM - & start_of_ROM);
3755 @end group
3756 @end smallexample
3757
3758 Note the use of the @samp{&} operators. These are correct.
3759
3760 @node SECTIONS
3761 @section SECTIONS Command
3762 @kindex SECTIONS
3763 The @code{SECTIONS} command tells the linker how to map input sections
3764 into output sections, and how to place the output sections in memory.
3765
3766 The format of the @code{SECTIONS} command is:
3767 @smallexample
3768 SECTIONS
3769 @{
3770 @var{sections-command}
3771 @var{sections-command}
3772 @dots{}
3773 @}
3774 @end smallexample
3775
3776 Each @var{sections-command} may of be one of the following:
3777
3778 @itemize @bullet
3779 @item
3780 an @code{ENTRY} command (@pxref{Entry Point,,Entry command})
3781 @item
3782 a symbol assignment (@pxref{Assignments})
3783 @item
3784 an output section description
3785 @item
3786 an overlay description
3787 @end itemize
3788
3789 The @code{ENTRY} command and symbol assignments are permitted inside the
3790 @code{SECTIONS} command for convenience in using the location counter in
3791 those commands. This can also make the linker script easier to
3792 understand because you can use those commands at meaningful points in
3793 the layout of the output file.
3794
3795 Output section descriptions and overlay descriptions are described
3796 below.
3797
3798 If you do not use a @code{SECTIONS} command in your linker script, the
3799 linker will place each input section into an identically named output
3800 section in the order that the sections are first encountered in the
3801 input files. If all input sections are present in the first file, for
3802 example, the order of sections in the output file will match the order
3803 in the first input file. The first section will be at address zero.
3804
3805 @menu
3806 * Output Section Description:: Output section description
3807 * Output Section Name:: Output section name
3808 * Output Section Address:: Output section address
3809 * Input Section:: Input section description
3810 * Output Section Data:: Output section data
3811 * Output Section Keywords:: Output section keywords
3812 * Output Section Discarding:: Output section discarding
3813 * Output Section Attributes:: Output section attributes
3814 * Overlay Description:: Overlay description
3815 @end menu
3816
3817 @node Output Section Description
3818 @subsection Output Section Description
3819 The full description of an output section looks like this:
3820 @smallexample
3821 @group
3822 @var{section} [@var{address}] [(@var{type})] :
3823 [AT(@var{lma})]
3824 [ALIGN(@var{section_align}) | ALIGN_WITH_INPUT]
3825 [SUBALIGN(@var{subsection_align})]
3826 [@var{constraint}]
3827 @{
3828 @var{output-section-command}
3829 @var{output-section-command}
3830 @dots{}
3831 @} [>@var{region}] [AT>@var{lma_region}] [:@var{phdr} :@var{phdr} @dots{}] [=@var{fillexp}] [,]
3832 @end group
3833 @end smallexample
3834
3835 Most output sections do not use most of the optional section attributes.
3836
3837 The whitespace around @var{section} is required, so that the section
3838 name is unambiguous. The colon and the curly braces are also required.
3839 The comma at the end may be required if a @var{fillexp} is used and
3840 the next @var{sections-command} looks like a continuation of the expression.
3841 The line breaks and other white space are optional.
3842
3843 Each @var{output-section-command} may be one of the following:
3844
3845 @itemize @bullet
3846 @item
3847 a symbol assignment (@pxref{Assignments})
3848 @item
3849 an input section description (@pxref{Input Section})
3850 @item
3851 data values to include directly (@pxref{Output Section Data})
3852 @item
3853 a special output section keyword (@pxref{Output Section Keywords})
3854 @end itemize
3855
3856 @node Output Section Name
3857 @subsection Output Section Name
3858 @cindex name, section
3859 @cindex section name
3860 The name of the output section is @var{section}. @var{section} must
3861 meet the constraints of your output format. In formats which only
3862 support a limited number of sections, such as @code{a.out}, the name
3863 must be one of the names supported by the format (@code{a.out}, for
3864 example, allows only @samp{.text}, @samp{.data} or @samp{.bss}). If the
3865 output format supports any number of sections, but with numbers and not
3866 names (as is the case for Oasys), the name should be supplied as a
3867 quoted numeric string. A section name may consist of any sequence of
3868 characters, but a name which contains any unusual characters such as
3869 commas must be quoted.
3870
3871 The output section name @samp{/DISCARD/} is special; @ref{Output Section
3872 Discarding}.
3873
3874 @node Output Section Address
3875 @subsection Output Section Address
3876 @cindex address, section
3877 @cindex section address
3878 The @var{address} is an expression for the VMA (the virtual memory
3879 address) of the output section. This address is optional, but if it
3880 is provided then the output address will be set exactly as specified.
3881
3882 If the output address is not specified then one will be chosen for the
3883 section, based on the heuristic below. This address will be adjusted
3884 to fit the alignment requirement of the output section. The
3885 alignment requirement is the strictest alignment of any input section
3886 contained within the output section.
3887
3888 The output section address heuristic is as follows:
3889
3890 @itemize @bullet
3891 @item
3892 If an output memory @var{region} is set for the section then it
3893 is added to this region and its address will be the next free address
3894 in that region.
3895
3896 @item
3897 If the MEMORY command has been used to create a list of memory
3898 regions then the first region which has attributes compatible with the
3899 section is selected to contain it. The section's output address will
3900 be the next free address in that region; @ref{MEMORY}.
3901
3902 @item
3903 If no memory regions were specified, or none match the section then
3904 the output address will be based on the current value of the location
3905 counter.
3906 @end itemize
3907
3908 @noindent
3909 For example:
3910
3911 @smallexample
3912 .text . : @{ *(.text) @}
3913 @end smallexample
3914
3915 @noindent
3916 and
3917
3918 @smallexample
3919 .text : @{ *(.text) @}
3920 @end smallexample
3921
3922 @noindent
3923 are subtly different. The first will set the address of the
3924 @samp{.text} output section to the current value of the location
3925 counter. The second will set it to the current value of the location
3926 counter aligned to the strictest alignment of any of the @samp{.text}
3927 input sections.
3928
3929 The @var{address} may be an arbitrary expression; @ref{Expressions}.
3930 For example, if you want to align the section on a 0x10 byte boundary,
3931 so that the lowest four bits of the section address are zero, you could
3932 do something like this:
3933 @smallexample
3934 .text ALIGN(0x10) : @{ *(.text) @}
3935 @end smallexample
3936 @noindent
3937 This works because @code{ALIGN} returns the current location counter
3938 aligned upward to the specified value.
3939
3940 Specifying @var{address} for a section will change the value of the
3941 location counter, provided that the section is non-empty. (Empty
3942 sections are ignored).
3943
3944 @node Input Section
3945 @subsection Input Section Description
3946 @cindex input sections
3947 @cindex mapping input sections to output sections
3948 The most common output section command is an input section description.
3949
3950 The input section description is the most basic linker script operation.
3951 You use output sections to tell the linker how to lay out your program
3952 in memory. You use input section descriptions to tell the linker how to
3953 map the input files into your memory layout.
3954
3955 @menu
3956 * Input Section Basics:: Input section basics
3957 * Input Section Wildcards:: Input section wildcard patterns
3958 * Input Section Common:: Input section for common symbols
3959 * Input Section Keep:: Input section and garbage collection
3960 * Input Section Example:: Input section example
3961 @end menu
3962
3963 @node Input Section Basics
3964 @subsubsection Input Section Basics
3965 @cindex input section basics
3966 An input section description consists of a file name optionally followed
3967 by a list of section names in parentheses.
3968
3969 The file name and the section name may be wildcard patterns, which we
3970 describe further below (@pxref{Input Section Wildcards}).
3971
3972 The most common input section description is to include all input
3973 sections with a particular name in the output section. For example, to
3974 include all input @samp{.text} sections, you would write:
3975 @smallexample
3976 *(.text)
3977 @end smallexample
3978 @noindent
3979 Here the @samp{*} is a wildcard which matches any file name. To exclude a list
3980 of files from matching the file name wildcard, EXCLUDE_FILE may be used to
3981 match all files except the ones specified in the EXCLUDE_FILE list. For
3982 example:
3983 @smallexample
3984 *(EXCLUDE_FILE (*crtend.o *otherfile.o) .ctors)
3985 @end smallexample
3986 will cause all .ctors sections from all files except @file{crtend.o} and
3987 @file{otherfile.o} to be included.
3988
3989 There are two ways to include more than one section:
3990 @smallexample
3991 *(.text .rdata)
3992 *(.text) *(.rdata)
3993 @end smallexample
3994 @noindent
3995 The difference between these is the order in which the @samp{.text} and
3996 @samp{.rdata} input sections will appear in the output section. In the
3997 first example, they will be intermingled, appearing in the same order as
3998 they are found in the linker input. In the second example, all
3999 @samp{.text} input sections will appear first, followed by all
4000 @samp{.rdata} input sections.
4001
4002 You can specify a file name to include sections from a particular file.
4003 You would do this if one or more of your files contain special data that
4004 needs to be at a particular location in memory. For example:
4005 @smallexample
4006 data.o(.data)
4007 @end smallexample
4008
4009 To refine the sections that are included based on the section flags
4010 of an input section, INPUT_SECTION_FLAGS may be used.
4011
4012 Here is a simple example for using Section header flags for ELF sections:
4013
4014 @smallexample
4015 @group
4016 SECTIONS @{
4017 .text : @{ INPUT_SECTION_FLAGS (SHF_MERGE & SHF_STRINGS) *(.text) @}
4018 .text2 : @{ INPUT_SECTION_FLAGS (!SHF_WRITE) *(.text) @}
4019 @}
4020 @end group
4021 @end smallexample
4022
4023 In this example, the output section @samp{.text} will be comprised of any
4024 input section matching the name *(.text) whose section header flags
4025 @code{SHF_MERGE} and @code{SHF_STRINGS} are set. The output section
4026 @samp{.text2} will be comprised of any input section matching the name *(.text)
4027 whose section header flag @code{SHF_WRITE} is clear.
4028
4029 You can also specify files within archives by writing a pattern
4030 matching the archive, a colon, then the pattern matching the file,
4031 with no whitespace around the colon.
4032
4033 @table @samp
4034 @item archive:file
4035 matches file within archive
4036 @item archive:
4037 matches the whole archive
4038 @item :file
4039 matches file but not one in an archive
4040 @end table
4041
4042 Either one or both of @samp{archive} and @samp{file} can contain shell
4043 wildcards. On DOS based file systems, the linker will assume that a
4044 single letter followed by a colon is a drive specifier, so
4045 @samp{c:myfile.o} is a simple file specification, not @samp{myfile.o}
4046 within an archive called @samp{c}. @samp{archive:file} filespecs may
4047 also be used within an @code{EXCLUDE_FILE} list, but may not appear in
4048 other linker script contexts. For instance, you cannot extract a file
4049 from an archive by using @samp{archive:file} in an @code{INPUT}
4050 command.
4051
4052 If you use a file name without a list of sections, then all sections in
4053 the input file will be included in the output section. This is not
4054 commonly done, but it may by useful on occasion. For example:
4055 @smallexample
4056 data.o
4057 @end smallexample
4058
4059 When you use a file name which is not an @samp{archive:file} specifier
4060 and does not contain any wild card
4061 characters, the linker will first see if you also specified the file
4062 name on the linker command line or in an @code{INPUT} command. If you
4063 did not, the linker will attempt to open the file as an input file, as
4064 though it appeared on the command line. Note that this differs from an
4065 @code{INPUT} command, because the linker will not search for the file in
4066 the archive search path.
4067
4068 @node Input Section Wildcards
4069 @subsubsection Input Section Wildcard Patterns
4070 @cindex input section wildcards
4071 @cindex wildcard file name patterns
4072 @cindex file name wildcard patterns
4073 @cindex section name wildcard patterns
4074 In an input section description, either the file name or the section
4075 name or both may be wildcard patterns.
4076
4077 The file name of @samp{*} seen in many examples is a simple wildcard
4078 pattern for the file name.
4079
4080 The wildcard patterns are like those used by the Unix shell.
4081
4082 @table @samp
4083 @item *
4084 matches any number of characters
4085 @item ?
4086 matches any single character
4087 @item [@var{chars}]
4088 matches a single instance of any of the @var{chars}; the @samp{-}
4089 character may be used to specify a range of characters, as in
4090 @samp{[a-z]} to match any lower case letter
4091 @item \
4092 quotes the following character
4093 @end table
4094
4095 When a file name is matched with a wildcard, the wildcard characters
4096 will not match a @samp{/} character (used to separate directory names on
4097 Unix). A pattern consisting of a single @samp{*} character is an
4098 exception; it will always match any file name, whether it contains a
4099 @samp{/} or not. In a section name, the wildcard characters will match
4100 a @samp{/} character.
4101
4102 File name wildcard patterns only match files which are explicitly
4103 specified on the command line or in an @code{INPUT} command. The linker
4104 does not search directories to expand wildcards.
4105
4106 If a file name matches more than one wildcard pattern, or if a file name
4107 appears explicitly and is also matched by a wildcard pattern, the linker
4108 will use the first match in the linker script. For example, this
4109 sequence of input section descriptions is probably in error, because the
4110 @file{data.o} rule will not be used:
4111 @smallexample
4112 .data : @{ *(.data) @}
4113 .data1 : @{ data.o(.data) @}
4114 @end smallexample
4115
4116 @cindex SORT_BY_NAME
4117 Normally, the linker will place files and sections matched by wildcards
4118 in the order in which they are seen during the link. You can change
4119 this by using the @code{SORT_BY_NAME} keyword, which appears before a wildcard
4120 pattern in parentheses (e.g., @code{SORT_BY_NAME(.text*)}). When the
4121 @code{SORT_BY_NAME} keyword is used, the linker will sort the files or sections
4122 into ascending order by name before placing them in the output file.
4123
4124 @cindex SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT
4125 @code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} is very similar to @code{SORT_BY_NAME}. The
4126 difference is @code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} will sort sections into
4127 descending order by alignment before placing them in the output file.
4128 Larger alignments are placed before smaller alignments in order to
4129 reduce the amount of padding necessary.
4130
4131 @cindex SORT_BY_INIT_PRIORITY
4132 @code{SORT_BY_INIT_PRIORITY} is very similar to @code{SORT_BY_NAME}. The
4133 difference is @code{SORT_BY_INIT_PRIORITY} will sort sections into
4134 ascending order by numerical value of the GCC init_priority attribute
4135 encoded in the section name before placing them in the output file.
4136
4137 @cindex SORT
4138 @code{SORT} is an alias for @code{SORT_BY_NAME}.
4139
4140 When there are nested section sorting commands in linker script, there
4141 can be at most 1 level of nesting for section sorting commands.
4142
4143 @enumerate
4144 @item
4145 @code{SORT_BY_NAME} (@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (wildcard section pattern)).
4146 It will sort the input sections by name first, then by alignment if two
4147 sections have the same name.
4148 @item
4149 @code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (wildcard section pattern)).
4150 It will sort the input sections by alignment first, then by name if two
4151 sections have the same alignment.
4152 @item
4153 @code{SORT_BY_NAME} (@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (wildcard section pattern)) is
4154 treated the same as @code{SORT_BY_NAME} (wildcard section pattern).
4155 @item
4156 @code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (wildcard section pattern))
4157 is treated the same as @code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (wildcard section pattern).
4158 @item
4159 All other nested section sorting commands are invalid.
4160 @end enumerate
4161
4162 When both command line section sorting option and linker script
4163 section sorting command are used, section sorting command always
4164 takes precedence over the command line option.
4165
4166 If the section sorting command in linker script isn't nested, the
4167 command line option will make the section sorting command to be
4168 treated as nested sorting command.
4169
4170 @enumerate
4171 @item
4172 @code{SORT_BY_NAME} (wildcard section pattern ) with
4173 @option{--sort-sections alignment} is equivalent to
4174 @code{SORT_BY_NAME} (@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (wildcard section pattern)).
4175 @item
4176 @code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (wildcard section pattern) with
4177 @option{--sort-section name} is equivalent to
4178 @code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (wildcard section pattern)).
4179 @end enumerate
4180
4181 If the section sorting command in linker script is nested, the
4182 command line option will be ignored.
4183
4184 @cindex SORT_NONE
4185 @code{SORT_NONE} disables section sorting by ignoring the command line
4186 section sorting option.
4187
4188 If you ever get confused about where input sections are going, use the
4189 @samp{-M} linker option to generate a map file. The map file shows
4190 precisely how input sections are mapped to output sections.
4191
4192 This example shows how wildcard patterns might be used to partition
4193 files. This linker script directs the linker to place all @samp{.text}
4194 sections in @samp{.text} and all @samp{.bss} sections in @samp{.bss}.
4195 The linker will place the @samp{.data} section from all files beginning
4196 with an upper case character in @samp{.DATA}; for all other files, the
4197 linker will place the @samp{.data} section in @samp{.data}.
4198 @smallexample
4199 @group
4200 SECTIONS @{
4201 .text : @{ *(.text) @}
4202 .DATA : @{ [A-Z]*(.data) @}
4203 .data : @{ *(.data) @}
4204 .bss : @{ *(.bss) @}
4205 @}
4206 @end group
4207 @end smallexample
4208
4209 @node Input Section Common
4210 @subsubsection Input Section for Common Symbols
4211 @cindex common symbol placement
4212 @cindex uninitialized data placement
4213 A special notation is needed for common symbols, because in many object
4214 file formats common symbols do not have a particular input section. The
4215 linker treats common symbols as though they are in an input section
4216 named @samp{COMMON}.
4217
4218 You may use file names with the @samp{COMMON} section just as with any
4219 other input sections. You can use this to place common symbols from a
4220 particular input file in one section while common symbols from other
4221 input files are placed in another section.
4222
4223 In most cases, common symbols in input files will be placed in the
4224 @samp{.bss} section in the output file. For example:
4225 @smallexample
4226 .bss @{ *(.bss) *(COMMON) @}
4227 @end smallexample
4228
4229 @cindex scommon section
4230 @cindex small common symbols
4231 Some object file formats have more than one type of common symbol. For
4232 example, the MIPS ELF object file format distinguishes standard common
4233 symbols and small common symbols. In this case, the linker will use a
4234 different special section name for other types of common symbols. In
4235 the case of MIPS ELF, the linker uses @samp{COMMON} for standard common
4236 symbols and @samp{.scommon} for small common symbols. This permits you
4237 to map the different types of common symbols into memory at different
4238 locations.
4239
4240 @cindex [COMMON]
4241 You will sometimes see @samp{[COMMON]} in old linker scripts. This
4242 notation is now considered obsolete. It is equivalent to
4243 @samp{*(COMMON)}.
4244
4245 @node Input Section Keep
4246 @subsubsection Input Section and Garbage Collection
4247 @cindex KEEP
4248 @cindex garbage collection
4249 When link-time garbage collection is in use (@samp{--gc-sections}),
4250 it is often useful to mark sections that should not be eliminated.
4251 This is accomplished by surrounding an input section's wildcard entry
4252 with @code{KEEP()}, as in @code{KEEP(*(.init))} or
4253 @code{KEEP(SORT_BY_NAME(*)(.ctors))}.
4254
4255 @node Input Section Example
4256 @subsubsection Input Section Example
4257 The following example is a complete linker script. It tells the linker
4258 to read all of the sections from file @file{all.o} and place them at the
4259 start of output section @samp{outputa} which starts at location
4260 @samp{0x10000}. All of section @samp{.input1} from file @file{foo.o}
4261 follows immediately, in the same output section. All of section
4262 @samp{.input2} from @file{foo.o} goes into output section
4263 @samp{outputb}, followed by section @samp{.input1} from @file{foo1.o}.
4264 All of the remaining @samp{.input1} and @samp{.input2} sections from any
4265 files are written to output section @samp{outputc}.
4266
4267 @smallexample
4268 @group
4269 SECTIONS @{
4270 outputa 0x10000 :
4271 @{
4272 all.o
4273 foo.o (.input1)
4274 @}
4275 @end group
4276 @group
4277 outputb :
4278 @{
4279 foo.o (.input2)
4280 foo1.o (.input1)
4281 @}
4282 @end group
4283 @group
4284 outputc :
4285 @{
4286 *(.input1)
4287 *(.input2)
4288 @}
4289 @}
4290 @end group
4291 @end smallexample
4292
4293 @node Output Section Data
4294 @subsection Output Section Data
4295 @cindex data
4296 @cindex section data
4297 @cindex output section data
4298 @kindex BYTE(@var{expression})
4299 @kindex SHORT(@var{expression})
4300 @kindex LONG(@var{expression})
4301 @kindex QUAD(@var{expression})
4302 @kindex SQUAD(@var{expression})
4303 You can include explicit bytes of data in an output section by using
4304 @code{BYTE}, @code{SHORT}, @code{LONG}, @code{QUAD}, or @code{SQUAD} as
4305 an output section command. Each keyword is followed by an expression in
4306 parentheses providing the value to store (@pxref{Expressions}). The
4307 value of the expression is stored at the current value of the location
4308 counter.
4309
4310 The @code{BYTE}, @code{SHORT}, @code{LONG}, and @code{QUAD} commands
4311 store one, two, four, and eight bytes (respectively). After storing the
4312 bytes, the location counter is incremented by the number of bytes
4313 stored.
4314
4315 For example, this will store the byte 1 followed by the four byte value
4316 of the symbol @samp{addr}:
4317 @smallexample
4318 BYTE(1)
4319 LONG(addr)
4320 @end smallexample
4321
4322 When using a 64 bit host or target, @code{QUAD} and @code{SQUAD} are the
4323 same; they both store an 8 byte, or 64 bit, value. When both host and
4324 target are 32 bits, an expression is computed as 32 bits. In this case
4325 @code{QUAD} stores a 32 bit value zero extended to 64 bits, and
4326 @code{SQUAD} stores a 32 bit value sign extended to 64 bits.
4327
4328 If the object file format of the output file has an explicit endianness,
4329 which is the normal case, the value will be stored in that endianness.
4330 When the object file format does not have an explicit endianness, as is
4331 true of, for example, S-records, the value will be stored in the
4332 endianness of the first input object file.
4333
4334 Note---these commands only work inside a section description and not
4335 between them, so the following will produce an error from the linker:
4336 @smallexample
4337 SECTIONS @{@ .text : @{@ *(.text) @}@ LONG(1) .data : @{@ *(.data) @}@ @}@
4338 @end smallexample
4339 whereas this will work:
4340 @smallexample
4341 SECTIONS @{@ .text : @{@ *(.text) ; LONG(1) @}@ .data : @{@ *(.data) @}@ @}@
4342 @end smallexample
4343
4344 @kindex FILL(@var{expression})
4345 @cindex holes, filling
4346 @cindex unspecified memory
4347 You may use the @code{FILL} command to set the fill pattern for the
4348 current section. It is followed by an expression in parentheses. Any
4349 otherwise unspecified regions of memory within the section (for example,
4350 gaps left due to the required alignment of input sections) are filled
4351 with the value of the expression, repeated as
4352 necessary. A @code{FILL} statement covers memory locations after the
4353 point at which it occurs in the section definition; by including more
4354 than one @code{FILL} statement, you can have different fill patterns in
4355 different parts of an output section.
4356
4357 This example shows how to fill unspecified regions of memory with the
4358 value @samp{0x90}:
4359 @smallexample
4360 FILL(0x90909090)
4361 @end smallexample
4362
4363 The @code{FILL} command is similar to the @samp{=@var{fillexp}} output
4364 section attribute, but it only affects the
4365 part of the section following the @code{FILL} command, rather than the
4366 entire section. If both are used, the @code{FILL} command takes
4367 precedence. @xref{Output Section Fill}, for details on the fill
4368 expression.
4369
4370 @node Output Section Keywords
4371 @subsection Output Section Keywords
4372 There are a couple of keywords which can appear as output section
4373 commands.
4374
4375 @table @code
4376 @kindex CREATE_OBJECT_SYMBOLS
4377 @cindex input filename symbols
4378 @cindex filename symbols
4379 @item CREATE_OBJECT_SYMBOLS
4380 The command tells the linker to create a symbol for each input file.
4381 The name of each symbol will be the name of the corresponding input
4382 file. The section of each symbol will be the output section in which
4383 the @code{CREATE_OBJECT_SYMBOLS} command appears.
4384
4385 This is conventional for the a.out object file format. It is not
4386 normally used for any other object file format.
4387
4388 @kindex CONSTRUCTORS
4389 @cindex C++ constructors, arranging in link
4390 @cindex constructors, arranging in link
4391 @item CONSTRUCTORS
4392 When linking using the a.out object file format, the linker uses an
4393 unusual set construct to support C++ global constructors and
4394 destructors. When linking object file formats which do not support
4395 arbitrary sections, such as ECOFF and XCOFF, the linker will
4396 automatically recognize C++ global constructors and destructors by name.
4397 For these object file formats, the @code{CONSTRUCTORS} command tells the
4398 linker to place constructor information in the output section where the
4399 @code{CONSTRUCTORS} command appears. The @code{CONSTRUCTORS} command is
4400 ignored for other object file formats.
4401
4402 The symbol @w{@code{__CTOR_LIST__}} marks the start of the global
4403 constructors, and the symbol @w{@code{__CTOR_END__}} marks the end.
4404 Similarly, @w{@code{__DTOR_LIST__}} and @w{@code{__DTOR_END__}} mark
4405 the start and end of the global destructors. The
4406 first word in the list is the number of entries, followed by the address
4407 of each constructor or destructor, followed by a zero word. The
4408 compiler must arrange to actually run the code. For these object file
4409 formats @sc{gnu} C++ normally calls constructors from a subroutine
4410 @code{__main}; a call to @code{__main} is automatically inserted into
4411 the startup code for @code{main}. @sc{gnu} C++ normally runs
4412 destructors either by using @code{atexit}, or directly from the function
4413 @code{exit}.
4414
4415 For object file formats such as @code{COFF} or @code{ELF} which support
4416 arbitrary section names, @sc{gnu} C++ will normally arrange to put the
4417 addresses of global constructors and destructors into the @code{.ctors}
4418 and @code{.dtors} sections. Placing the following sequence into your
4419 linker script will build the sort of table which the @sc{gnu} C++
4420 runtime code expects to see.
4421
4422 @smallexample
4423 __CTOR_LIST__ = .;
4424 LONG((__CTOR_END__ - __CTOR_LIST__) / 4 - 2)
4425 *(.ctors)
4426 LONG(0)
4427 __CTOR_END__ = .;
4428 __DTOR_LIST__ = .;
4429 LONG((__DTOR_END__ - __DTOR_LIST__) / 4 - 2)
4430 *(.dtors)
4431 LONG(0)
4432 __DTOR_END__ = .;
4433 @end smallexample
4434
4435 If you are using the @sc{gnu} C++ support for initialization priority,
4436 which provides some control over the order in which global constructors
4437 are run, you must sort the constructors at link time to ensure that they
4438 are executed in the correct order. When using the @code{CONSTRUCTORS}
4439 command, use @samp{SORT_BY_NAME(CONSTRUCTORS)} instead. When using the
4440 @code{.ctors} and @code{.dtors} sections, use @samp{*(SORT_BY_NAME(.ctors))} and
4441 @samp{*(SORT_BY_NAME(.dtors))} instead of just @samp{*(.ctors)} and
4442 @samp{*(.dtors)}.
4443
4444 Normally the compiler and linker will handle these issues automatically,
4445 and you will not need to concern yourself with them. However, you may
4446 need to consider this if you are using C++ and writing your own linker
4447 scripts.
4448
4449 @end table
4450
4451 @node Output Section Discarding
4452 @subsection Output Section Discarding
4453 @cindex discarding sections
4454 @cindex sections, discarding
4455 @cindex removing sections
4456 The linker will not normally create output sections with no contents.
4457 This is for convenience when referring to input sections that may or
4458 may not be present in any of the input files. For example:
4459 @smallexample
4460 .foo : @{ *(.foo) @}
4461 @end smallexample
4462 @noindent
4463 will only create a @samp{.foo} section in the output file if there is a
4464 @samp{.foo} section in at least one input file, and if the input
4465 sections are not all empty. Other link script directives that allocate
4466 space in an output section will also create the output section. So
4467 too will assignments to dot even if the assignment does not create
4468 space, except for @samp{. = 0}, @samp{. = . + 0}, @samp{. = sym},
4469 @samp{. = . + sym} and @samp{. = ALIGN (. != 0, expr, 1)} when
4470 @samp{sym} is an absolute symbol of value 0 defined in the script.
4471 This allows you to force output of an empty section with @samp{. = .}.
4472
4473 The linker will ignore address assignments (@pxref{Output Section Address})
4474 on discarded output sections, except when the linker script defines
4475 symbols in the output section. In that case the linker will obey
4476 the address assignments, possibly advancing dot even though the
4477 section is discarded.
4478
4479 @cindex /DISCARD/
4480 The special output section name @samp{/DISCARD/} may be used to discard
4481 input sections. Any input sections which are assigned to an output
4482 section named @samp{/DISCARD/} are not included in the output file.
4483
4484 @node Output Section Attributes
4485 @subsection Output Section Attributes
4486 @cindex output section attributes
4487 We showed above that the full description of an output section looked
4488 like this:
4489
4490 @smallexample
4491 @group
4492 @var{section} [@var{address}] [(@var{type})] :
4493 [AT(@var{lma})]
4494 [ALIGN(@var{section_align})]
4495 [SUBALIGN(@var{subsection_align})]
4496 [@var{constraint}]
4497 @{
4498 @var{output-section-command}
4499 @var{output-section-command}
4500 @dots{}
4501 @} [>@var{region}] [AT>@var{lma_region}] [:@var{phdr} :@var{phdr} @dots{}] [=@var{fillexp}]
4502 @end group
4503 @end smallexample
4504
4505 We've already described @var{section}, @var{address}, and
4506 @var{output-section-command}. In this section we will describe the
4507 remaining section attributes.
4508
4509 @menu
4510 * Output Section Type:: Output section type
4511 * Output Section LMA:: Output section LMA
4512 * Forced Output Alignment:: Forced Output Alignment
4513 * Forced Input Alignment:: Forced Input Alignment
4514 * Output Section Constraint:: Output section constraint
4515 * Output Section Region:: Output section region
4516 * Output Section Phdr:: Output section phdr
4517 * Output Section Fill:: Output section fill
4518 @end menu
4519
4520 @node Output Section Type
4521 @subsubsection Output Section Type
4522 Each output section may have a type. The type is a keyword in
4523 parentheses. The following types are defined:
4524
4525 @table @code
4526 @item NOLOAD
4527 The section should be marked as not loadable, so that it will not be
4528 loaded into memory when the program is run.
4529 @item DSECT
4530 @itemx COPY
4531 @itemx INFO
4532 @itemx OVERLAY
4533 These type names are supported for backward compatibility, and are
4534 rarely used. They all have the same effect: the section should be
4535 marked as not allocatable, so that no memory is allocated for the
4536 section when the program is run.
4537 @end table
4538
4539 @kindex NOLOAD
4540 @cindex prevent unnecessary loading
4541 @cindex loading, preventing
4542 The linker normally sets the attributes of an output section based on
4543 the input sections which map into it. You can override this by using
4544 the section type. For example, in the script sample below, the
4545 @samp{ROM} section is addressed at memory location @samp{0} and does not
4546 need to be loaded when the program is run.
4547 @smallexample
4548 @group
4549 SECTIONS @{
4550 ROM 0 (NOLOAD) : @{ @dots{} @}
4551 @dots{}
4552 @}
4553 @end group
4554 @end smallexample
4555
4556 @node Output Section LMA
4557 @subsubsection Output Section LMA
4558 @kindex AT>@var{lma_region}
4559 @kindex AT(@var{lma})
4560 @cindex load address
4561 @cindex section load address
4562 Every section has a virtual address (VMA) and a load address (LMA); see
4563 @ref{Basic Script Concepts}. The virtual address is specified by the
4564 @pxref{Output Section Address} described earlier. The load address is
4565 specified by the @code{AT} or @code{AT>} keywords. Specifying a load
4566 address is optional.
4567
4568 The @code{AT} keyword takes an expression as an argument. This
4569 specifies the exact load address of the section. The @code{AT>} keyword
4570 takes the name of a memory region as an argument. @xref{MEMORY}. The
4571 load address of the section is set to the next free address in the
4572 region, aligned to the section's alignment requirements.
4573
4574 If neither @code{AT} nor @code{AT>} is specified for an allocatable
4575 section, the linker will use the following heuristic to determine the
4576 load address:
4577
4578 @itemize @bullet
4579 @item
4580 If the section has a specific VMA address, then this is used as
4581 the LMA address as well.
4582
4583 @item
4584 If the section is not allocatable then its LMA is set to its VMA.
4585
4586 @item
4587 Otherwise if a memory region can be found that is compatible
4588 with the current section, and this region contains at least one
4589 section, then the LMA is set so the difference between the
4590 VMA and LMA is the same as the difference between the VMA and LMA of
4591 the last section in the located region.
4592
4593 @item
4594 If no memory regions have been declared then a default region
4595 that covers the entire address space is used in the previous step.
4596
4597 @item
4598 If no suitable region could be found, or there was no previous
4599 section then the LMA is set equal to the VMA.
4600 @end itemize
4601
4602 @cindex ROM initialized data
4603 @cindex initialized data in ROM
4604 This feature is designed to make it easy to build a ROM image. For
4605 example, the following linker script creates three output sections: one
4606 called @samp{.text}, which starts at @code{0x1000}, one called
4607 @samp{.mdata}, which is loaded at the end of the @samp{.text} section
4608 even though its VMA is @code{0x2000}, and one called @samp{.bss} to hold
4609 uninitialized data at address @code{0x3000}. The symbol @code{_data} is
4610 defined with the value @code{0x2000}, which shows that the location
4611 counter holds the VMA value, not the LMA value.
4612
4613 @smallexample
4614 @group
4615 SECTIONS
4616 @{
4617 .text 0x1000 : @{ *(.text) _etext = . ; @}
4618 .mdata 0x2000 :
4619 AT ( ADDR (.text) + SIZEOF (.text) )
4620 @{ _data = . ; *(.data); _edata = . ; @}
4621 .bss 0x3000 :
4622 @{ _bstart = . ; *(.bss) *(COMMON) ; _bend = . ;@}
4623 @}
4624 @end group
4625 @end smallexample
4626
4627 The run-time initialization code for use with a program generated with
4628 this linker script would include something like the following, to copy
4629 the initialized data from the ROM image to its runtime address. Notice
4630 how this code takes advantage of the symbols defined by the linker
4631 script.
4632
4633 @smallexample
4634 @group
4635 extern char _etext, _data, _edata, _bstart, _bend;
4636 char *src = &_etext;
4637 char *dst = &_data;
4638
4639 /* ROM has data at end of text; copy it. */
4640 while (dst < &_edata)
4641 *dst++ = *src++;
4642
4643 /* Zero bss. */
4644 for (dst = &_bstart; dst< &_bend; dst++)
4645 *dst = 0;
4646 @end group
4647 @end smallexample
4648
4649 @node Forced Output Alignment
4650 @subsubsection Forced Output Alignment
4651 @kindex ALIGN(@var{section_align})
4652 @cindex forcing output section alignment
4653 @cindex output section alignment
4654 You can increase an output section's alignment by using ALIGN. As an
4655 alternative you can enforce that the difference between the VMA and LMA remains
4656 intact throughout this output section with the ALIGN_WITH_INPUT attribute.
4657
4658 @node Forced Input Alignment
4659 @subsubsection Forced Input Alignment
4660 @kindex SUBALIGN(@var{subsection_align})
4661 @cindex forcing input section alignment
4662 @cindex input section alignment
4663 You can force input section alignment within an output section by using
4664 SUBALIGN. The value specified overrides any alignment given by input
4665 sections, whether larger or smaller.
4666
4667 @node Output Section Constraint
4668 @subsubsection Output Section Constraint
4669 @kindex ONLY_IF_RO
4670 @kindex ONLY_IF_RW
4671 @cindex constraints on output sections
4672 You can specify that an output section should only be created if all
4673 of its input sections are read-only or all of its input sections are
4674 read-write by using the keyword @code{ONLY_IF_RO} and
4675 @code{ONLY_IF_RW} respectively.
4676
4677 @node Output Section Region
4678 @subsubsection Output Section Region
4679 @kindex >@var{region}
4680 @cindex section, assigning to memory region
4681 @cindex memory regions and sections
4682 You can assign a section to a previously defined region of memory by
4683 using @samp{>@var{region}}. @xref{MEMORY}.
4684
4685 Here is a simple example:
4686 @smallexample
4687 @group
4688 MEMORY @{ rom : ORIGIN = 0x1000, LENGTH = 0x1000 @}
4689 SECTIONS @{ ROM : @{ *(.text) @} >rom @}
4690 @end group
4691 @end smallexample
4692
4693 @node Output Section Phdr
4694 @subsubsection Output Section Phdr
4695 @kindex :@var{phdr}
4696 @cindex section, assigning to program header
4697 @cindex program headers and sections
4698 You can assign a section to a previously defined program segment by
4699 using @samp{:@var{phdr}}. @xref{PHDRS}. If a section is assigned to
4700 one or more segments, then all subsequent allocated sections will be
4701 assigned to those segments as well, unless they use an explicitly
4702 @code{:@var{phdr}} modifier. You can use @code{:NONE} to tell the
4703 linker to not put the section in any segment at all.
4704
4705 Here is a simple example:
4706 @smallexample
4707 @group
4708 PHDRS @{ text PT_LOAD ; @}
4709 SECTIONS @{ .text : @{ *(.text) @} :text @}
4710 @end group
4711 @end smallexample
4712
4713 @node Output Section Fill
4714 @subsubsection Output Section Fill
4715 @kindex =@var{fillexp}
4716 @cindex section fill pattern
4717 @cindex fill pattern, entire section
4718 You can set the fill pattern for an entire section by using
4719 @samp{=@var{fillexp}}. @var{fillexp} is an expression
4720 (@pxref{Expressions}). Any otherwise unspecified regions of memory
4721 within the output section (for example, gaps left due to the required
4722 alignment of input sections) will be filled with the value, repeated as
4723 necessary. If the fill expression is a simple hex number, ie. a string
4724 of hex digit starting with @samp{0x} and without a trailing @samp{k} or @samp{M}, then
4725 an arbitrarily long sequence of hex digits can be used to specify the
4726 fill pattern; Leading zeros become part of the pattern too. For all
4727 other cases, including extra parentheses or a unary @code{+}, the fill
4728 pattern is the four least significant bytes of the value of the
4729 expression. In all cases, the number is big-endian.
4730
4731 You can also change the fill value with a @code{FILL} command in the
4732 output section commands; (@pxref{Output Section Data}).
4733
4734 Here is a simple example:
4735 @smallexample
4736 @group
4737 SECTIONS @{ .text : @{ *(.text) @} =0x90909090 @}
4738 @end group
4739 @end smallexample
4740
4741 @node Overlay Description
4742 @subsection Overlay Description
4743 @kindex OVERLAY
4744 @cindex overlays
4745 An overlay description provides an easy way to describe sections which
4746 are to be loaded as part of a single memory image but are to be run at
4747 the same memory address. At run time, some sort of overlay manager will
4748 copy the overlaid sections in and out of the runtime memory address as
4749 required, perhaps by simply manipulating addressing bits. This approach
4750 can be useful, for example, when a certain region of memory is faster
4751 than another.
4752
4753 Overlays are described using the @code{OVERLAY} command. The
4754 @code{OVERLAY} command is used within a @code{SECTIONS} command, like an
4755 output section description. The full syntax of the @code{OVERLAY}
4756 command is as follows:
4757 @smallexample
4758 @group
4759 OVERLAY [@var{start}] : [NOCROSSREFS] [AT ( @var{ldaddr} )]
4760 @{
4761 @var{secname1}
4762 @{
4763 @var{output-section-command}
4764 @var{output-section-command}
4765 @dots{}
4766 @} [:@var{phdr}@dots{}] [=@var{fill}]
4767 @var{secname2}
4768 @{
4769 @var{output-section-command}
4770 @var{output-section-command}
4771 @dots{}
4772 @} [:@var{phdr}@dots{}] [=@var{fill}]
4773 @dots{}
4774 @} [>@var{region}] [:@var{phdr}@dots{}] [=@var{fill}] [,]
4775 @end group
4776 @end smallexample
4777
4778 Everything is optional except @code{OVERLAY} (a keyword), and each
4779 section must have a name (@var{secname1} and @var{secname2} above). The
4780 section definitions within the @code{OVERLAY} construct are identical to
4781 those within the general @code{SECTIONS} construct (@pxref{SECTIONS}),
4782 except that no addresses and no memory regions may be defined for
4783 sections within an @code{OVERLAY}.
4784
4785 The comma at the end may be required if a @var{fill} is used and
4786 the next @var{sections-command} looks like a continuation of the expression.
4787
4788 The sections are all defined with the same starting address. The load
4789 addresses of the sections are arranged such that they are consecutive in
4790 memory starting at the load address used for the @code{OVERLAY} as a
4791 whole (as with normal section definitions, the load address is optional,
4792 and defaults to the start address; the start address is also optional,
4793 and defaults to the current value of the location counter).
4794
4795 If the @code{NOCROSSREFS} keyword is used, and there are any
4796 references among the sections, the linker will report an error. Since
4797 the sections all run at the same address, it normally does not make
4798 sense for one section to refer directly to another.
4799 @xref{Miscellaneous Commands, NOCROSSREFS}.
4800
4801 For each section within the @code{OVERLAY}, the linker automatically
4802 provides two symbols. The symbol @code{__load_start_@var{secname}} is
4803 defined as the starting load address of the section. The symbol
4804 @code{__load_stop_@var{secname}} is defined as the final load address of
4805 the section. Any characters within @var{secname} which are not legal
4806 within C identifiers are removed. C (or assembler) code may use these
4807 symbols to move the overlaid sections around as necessary.
4808
4809 At the end of the overlay, the value of the location counter is set to
4810 the start address of the overlay plus the size of the largest section.
4811
4812 Here is an example. Remember that this would appear inside a
4813 @code{SECTIONS} construct.
4814 @smallexample
4815 @group
4816 OVERLAY 0x1000 : AT (0x4000)
4817 @{
4818 .text0 @{ o1/*.o(.text) @}
4819 .text1 @{ o2/*.o(.text) @}
4820 @}
4821 @end group
4822 @end smallexample
4823 @noindent
4824 This will define both @samp{.text0} and @samp{.text1} to start at
4825 address 0x1000. @samp{.text0} will be loaded at address 0x4000, and
4826 @samp{.text1} will be loaded immediately after @samp{.text0}. The
4827 following symbols will be defined if referenced: @code{__load_start_text0},
4828 @code{__load_stop_text0}, @code{__load_start_text1},
4829 @code{__load_stop_text1}.
4830
4831 C code to copy overlay @code{.text1} into the overlay area might look
4832 like the following.
4833
4834 @smallexample
4835 @group
4836 extern char __load_start_text1, __load_stop_text1;
4837 memcpy ((char *) 0x1000, &__load_start_text1,
4838 &__load_stop_text1 - &__load_start_text1);
4839 @end group
4840 @end smallexample
4841
4842 Note that the @code{OVERLAY} command is just syntactic sugar, since
4843 everything it does can be done using the more basic commands. The above
4844 example could have been written identically as follows.
4845
4846 @smallexample
4847 @group
4848 .text0 0x1000 : AT (0x4000) @{ o1/*.o(.text) @}
4849 PROVIDE (__load_start_text0 = LOADADDR (.text0));
4850 PROVIDE (__load_stop_text0 = LOADADDR (.text0) + SIZEOF (.text0));
4851 .text1 0x1000 : AT (0x4000 + SIZEOF (.text0)) @{ o2/*.o(.text) @}
4852 PROVIDE (__load_start_text1 = LOADADDR (.text1));
4853 PROVIDE (__load_stop_text1 = LOADADDR (.text1) + SIZEOF (.text1));
4854 . = 0x1000 + MAX (SIZEOF (.text0), SIZEOF (.text1));
4855 @end group
4856 @end smallexample
4857
4858 @node MEMORY
4859 @section MEMORY Command
4860 @kindex MEMORY
4861 @cindex memory regions
4862 @cindex regions of memory
4863 @cindex allocating memory
4864 @cindex discontinuous memory
4865 The linker's default configuration permits allocation of all available
4866 memory. You can override this by using the @code{MEMORY} command.
4867
4868 The @code{MEMORY} command describes the location and size of blocks of
4869 memory in the target. You can use it to describe which memory regions
4870 may be used by the linker, and which memory regions it must avoid. You
4871 can then assign sections to particular memory regions. The linker will
4872 set section addresses based on the memory regions, and will warn about
4873 regions that become too full. The linker will not shuffle sections
4874 around to fit into the available regions.
4875
4876 A linker script may contain at most one use of the @code{MEMORY}
4877 command. However, you can define as many blocks of memory within it as
4878 you wish. The syntax is:
4879 @smallexample
4880 @group
4881 MEMORY
4882 @{
4883 @var{name} [(@var{attr})] : ORIGIN = @var{origin}, LENGTH = @var{len}
4884 @dots{}
4885 @}
4886 @end group
4887 @end smallexample
4888
4889 The @var{name} is a name used in the linker script to refer to the
4890 region. The region name has no meaning outside of the linker script.
4891 Region names are stored in a separate name space, and will not conflict
4892 with symbol names, file names, or section names. Each memory region
4893 must have a distinct name within the @code{MEMORY} command. However you can
4894 add later alias names to existing memory regions with the @ref{REGION_ALIAS}
4895 command.
4896
4897 @cindex memory region attributes
4898 The @var{attr} string is an optional list of attributes that specify
4899 whether to use a particular memory region for an input section which is
4900 not explicitly mapped in the linker script. As described in
4901 @ref{SECTIONS}, if you do not specify an output section for some input
4902 section, the linker will create an output section with the same name as
4903 the input section. If you define region attributes, the linker will use
4904 them to select the memory region for the output section that it creates.
4905
4906 The @var{attr} string must consist only of the following characters:
4907 @table @samp
4908 @item R
4909 Read-only section
4910 @item W
4911 Read/write section
4912 @item X
4913 Executable section
4914 @item A
4915 Allocatable section
4916 @item I
4917 Initialized section
4918 @item L
4919 Same as @samp{I}
4920 @item !
4921 Invert the sense of any of the attributes that follow
4922 @end table
4923
4924 If a unmapped section matches any of the listed attributes other than
4925 @samp{!}, it will be placed in the memory region. The @samp{!}
4926 attribute reverses this test, so that an unmapped section will be placed
4927 in the memory region only if it does not match any of the listed
4928 attributes.
4929
4930 @kindex ORIGIN =
4931 @kindex o =
4932 @kindex org =
4933 The @var{origin} is an numerical expression for the start address of
4934 the memory region. The expression must evaluate to a constant and it
4935 cannot involve any symbols. The keyword @code{ORIGIN} may be
4936 abbreviated to @code{org} or @code{o} (but not, for example,
4937 @code{ORG}).
4938
4939 @kindex LENGTH =
4940 @kindex len =
4941 @kindex l =
4942 The @var{len} is an expression for the size in bytes of the memory
4943 region. As with the @var{origin} expression, the expression must
4944 be numerical only and must evaluate to a constant. The keyword
4945 @code{LENGTH} may be abbreviated to @code{len} or @code{l}.
4946
4947 In the following example, we specify that there are two memory regions
4948 available for allocation: one starting at @samp{0} for 256 kilobytes,
4949 and the other starting at @samp{0x40000000} for four megabytes. The
4950 linker will place into the @samp{rom} memory region every section which
4951 is not explicitly mapped into a memory region, and is either read-only
4952 or executable. The linker will place other sections which are not
4953 explicitly mapped into a memory region into the @samp{ram} memory
4954 region.
4955
4956 @smallexample
4957 @group
4958 MEMORY
4959 @{
4960 rom (rx) : ORIGIN = 0, LENGTH = 256K
4961 ram (!rx) : org = 0x40000000, l = 4M
4962 @}
4963 @end group
4964 @end smallexample
4965
4966 Once you define a memory region, you can direct the linker to place
4967 specific output sections into that memory region by using the
4968 @samp{>@var{region}} output section attribute. For example, if you have
4969 a memory region named @samp{mem}, you would use @samp{>mem} in the
4970 output section definition. @xref{Output Section Region}. If no address
4971 was specified for the output section, the linker will set the address to
4972 the next available address within the memory region. If the combined
4973 output sections directed to a memory region are too large for the
4974 region, the linker will issue an error message.
4975
4976 It is possible to access the origin and length of a memory in an
4977 expression via the @code{ORIGIN(@var{memory})} and
4978 @code{LENGTH(@var{memory})} functions:
4979
4980 @smallexample
4981 @group
4982 _fstack = ORIGIN(ram) + LENGTH(ram) - 4;
4983 @end group
4984 @end smallexample
4985
4986 @node PHDRS
4987 @section PHDRS Command
4988 @kindex PHDRS
4989 @cindex program headers
4990 @cindex ELF program headers
4991 @cindex program segments
4992 @cindex segments, ELF
4993 The ELF object file format uses @dfn{program headers}, also knows as
4994 @dfn{segments}. The program headers describe how the program should be
4995 loaded into memory. You can print them out by using the @code{objdump}
4996 program with the @samp{-p} option.
4997
4998 When you run an ELF program on a native ELF system, the system loader
4999 reads the program headers in order to figure out how to load the
5000 program. This will only work if the program headers are set correctly.
5001 This manual does not describe the details of how the system loader
5002 interprets program headers; for more information, see the ELF ABI.
5003
5004 The linker will create reasonable program headers by default. However,
5005 in some cases, you may need to specify the program headers more
5006 precisely. You may use the @code{PHDRS} command for this purpose. When
5007 the linker sees the @code{PHDRS} command in the linker script, it will
5008 not create any program headers other than the ones specified.
5009
5010 The linker only pays attention to the @code{PHDRS} command when
5011 generating an ELF output file. In other cases, the linker will simply
5012 ignore @code{PHDRS}.
5013
5014 This is the syntax of the @code{PHDRS} command. The words @code{PHDRS},
5015 @code{FILEHDR}, @code{AT}, and @code{FLAGS} are keywords.
5016
5017 @smallexample
5018 @group
5019 PHDRS
5020 @{
5021 @var{name} @var{type} [ FILEHDR ] [ PHDRS ] [ AT ( @var{address} ) ]
5022 [ FLAGS ( @var{flags} ) ] ;
5023 @}
5024 @end group
5025 @end smallexample
5026
5027 The @var{name} is used only for reference in the @code{SECTIONS} command
5028 of the linker script. It is not put into the output file. Program
5029 header names are stored in a separate name space, and will not conflict
5030 with symbol names, file names, or section names. Each program header
5031 must have a distinct name. The headers are processed in order and it
5032 is usual for them to map to sections in ascending load address order.
5033
5034 Certain program header types describe segments of memory which the
5035 system loader will load from the file. In the linker script, you
5036 specify the contents of these segments by placing allocatable output
5037 sections in the segments. You use the @samp{:@var{phdr}} output section
5038 attribute to place a section in a particular segment. @xref{Output
5039 Section Phdr}.
5040
5041 It is normal to put certain sections in more than one segment. This
5042 merely implies that one segment of memory contains another. You may
5043 repeat @samp{:@var{phdr}}, using it once for each segment which should
5044 contain the section.
5045
5046 If you place a section in one or more segments using @samp{:@var{phdr}},
5047 then the linker will place all subsequent allocatable sections which do
5048 not specify @samp{:@var{phdr}} in the same segments. This is for
5049 convenience, since generally a whole set of contiguous sections will be
5050 placed in a single segment. You can use @code{:NONE} to override the
5051 default segment and tell the linker to not put the section in any
5052 segment at all.
5053
5054 @kindex FILEHDR
5055 @kindex PHDRS
5056 You may use the @code{FILEHDR} and @code{PHDRS} keywords after
5057 the program header type to further describe the contents of the segment.
5058 The @code{FILEHDR} keyword means that the segment should include the ELF
5059 file header. The @code{PHDRS} keyword means that the segment should
5060 include the ELF program headers themselves. If applied to a loadable
5061 segment (@code{PT_LOAD}), all prior loadable segments must have one of
5062 these keywords.
5063
5064 The @var{type} may be one of the following. The numbers indicate the
5065 value of the keyword.
5066
5067 @table @asis
5068 @item @code{PT_NULL} (0)
5069 Indicates an unused program header.
5070
5071 @item @code{PT_LOAD} (1)
5072 Indicates that this program header describes a segment to be loaded from
5073 the file.
5074
5075 @item @code{PT_DYNAMIC} (2)
5076 Indicates a segment where dynamic linking information can be found.
5077
5078 @item @code{PT_INTERP} (3)
5079 Indicates a segment where the name of the program interpreter may be
5080 found.
5081
5082 @item @code{PT_NOTE} (4)
5083 Indicates a segment holding note information.
5084
5085 @item @code{PT_SHLIB} (5)
5086 A reserved program header type, defined but not specified by the ELF
5087 ABI.
5088
5089 @item @code{PT_PHDR} (6)
5090 Indicates a segment where the program headers may be found.
5091
5092 @item @var{expression}
5093 An expression giving the numeric type of the program header. This may
5094 be used for types not defined above.
5095 @end table
5096
5097 You can specify that a segment should be loaded at a particular address
5098 in memory by using an @code{AT} expression. This is identical to the
5099 @code{AT} command used as an output section attribute (@pxref{Output
5100 Section LMA}). The @code{AT} command for a program header overrides the
5101 output section attribute.
5102
5103 The linker will normally set the segment flags based on the sections
5104 which comprise the segment. You may use the @code{FLAGS} keyword to
5105 explicitly specify the segment flags. The value of @var{flags} must be
5106 an integer. It is used to set the @code{p_flags} field of the program
5107 header.
5108
5109 Here is an example of @code{PHDRS}. This shows a typical set of program
5110 headers used on a native ELF system.
5111
5112 @example
5113 @group
5114 PHDRS
5115 @{
5116 headers PT_PHDR PHDRS ;
5117 interp PT_INTERP ;
5118 text PT_LOAD FILEHDR PHDRS ;
5119 data PT_LOAD ;
5120 dynamic PT_DYNAMIC ;
5121 @}
5122
5123 SECTIONS
5124 @{
5125 . = SIZEOF_HEADERS;
5126 .interp : @{ *(.interp) @} :text :interp
5127 .text : @{ *(.text) @} :text
5128 .rodata : @{ *(.rodata) @} /* defaults to :text */
5129 @dots{}
5130 . = . + 0x1000; /* move to a new page in memory */
5131 .data : @{ *(.data) @} :data
5132 .dynamic : @{ *(.dynamic) @} :data :dynamic
5133 @dots{}
5134 @}
5135 @end group
5136 @end example
5137
5138 @node VERSION
5139 @section VERSION Command
5140 @kindex VERSION @{script text@}
5141 @cindex symbol versions
5142 @cindex version script
5143 @cindex versions of symbols
5144 The linker supports symbol versions when using ELF. Symbol versions are
5145 only useful when using shared libraries. The dynamic linker can use
5146 symbol versions to select a specific version of a function when it runs
5147 a program that may have been linked against an earlier version of the
5148 shared library.
5149
5150 You can include a version script directly in the main linker script, or
5151 you can supply the version script as an implicit linker script. You can
5152 also use the @samp{--version-script} linker option.
5153
5154 The syntax of the @code{VERSION} command is simply
5155 @smallexample
5156 VERSION @{ version-script-commands @}
5157 @end smallexample
5158
5159 The format of the version script commands is identical to that used by
5160 Sun's linker in Solaris 2.5. The version script defines a tree of
5161 version nodes. You specify the node names and interdependencies in the
5162 version script. You can specify which symbols are bound to which
5163 version nodes, and you can reduce a specified set of symbols to local
5164 scope so that they are not globally visible outside of the shared
5165 library.
5166
5167 The easiest way to demonstrate the version script language is with a few
5168 examples.
5169
5170 @smallexample
5171 VERS_1.1 @{
5172 global:
5173 foo1;
5174 local:
5175 old*;
5176 original*;
5177 new*;
5178 @};
5179
5180 VERS_1.2 @{
5181 foo2;
5182 @} VERS_1.1;
5183
5184 VERS_2.0 @{
5185 bar1; bar2;
5186 extern "C++" @{
5187 ns::*;
5188 "f(int, double)";
5189 @};
5190 @} VERS_1.2;
5191 @end smallexample
5192
5193 This example version script defines three version nodes. The first
5194 version node defined is @samp{VERS_1.1}; it has no other dependencies.
5195 The script binds the symbol @samp{foo1} to @samp{VERS_1.1}. It reduces
5196 a number of symbols to local scope so that they are not visible outside
5197 of the shared library; this is done using wildcard patterns, so that any
5198 symbol whose name begins with @samp{old}, @samp{original}, or @samp{new}
5199 is matched. The wildcard patterns available are the same as those used
5200 in the shell when matching filenames (also known as ``globbing'').
5201 However, if you specify the symbol name inside double quotes, then the
5202 name is treated as literal, rather than as a glob pattern.
5203
5204 Next, the version script defines node @samp{VERS_1.2}. This node
5205 depends upon @samp{VERS_1.1}. The script binds the symbol @samp{foo2}
5206 to the version node @samp{VERS_1.2}.
5207
5208 Finally, the version script defines node @samp{VERS_2.0}. This node
5209 depends upon @samp{VERS_1.2}. The scripts binds the symbols @samp{bar1}
5210 and @samp{bar2} are bound to the version node @samp{VERS_2.0}.
5211
5212 When the linker finds a symbol defined in a library which is not
5213 specifically bound to a version node, it will effectively bind it to an
5214 unspecified base version of the library. You can bind all otherwise
5215 unspecified symbols to a given version node by using @samp{global: *;}
5216 somewhere in the version script. Note that it's slightly crazy to use
5217 wildcards in a global spec except on the last version node. Global
5218 wildcards elsewhere run the risk of accidentally adding symbols to the
5219 set exported for an old version. That's wrong since older versions
5220 ought to have a fixed set of symbols.
5221
5222 The names of the version nodes have no specific meaning other than what
5223 they might suggest to the person reading them. The @samp{2.0} version
5224 could just as well have appeared in between @samp{1.1} and @samp{1.2}.
5225 However, this would be a confusing way to write a version script.
5226
5227 Node name can be omitted, provided it is the only version node
5228 in the version script. Such version script doesn't assign any versions to
5229 symbols, only selects which symbols will be globally visible out and which
5230 won't.
5231
5232 @smallexample
5233 @{ global: foo; bar; local: *; @};
5234 @end smallexample
5235
5236 When you link an application against a shared library that has versioned
5237 symbols, the application itself knows which version of each symbol it
5238 requires, and it also knows which version nodes it needs from each
5239 shared library it is linked against. Thus at runtime, the dynamic
5240 loader can make a quick check to make sure that the libraries you have
5241 linked against do in fact supply all of the version nodes that the
5242 application will need to resolve all of the dynamic symbols. In this
5243 way it is possible for the dynamic linker to know with certainty that
5244 all external symbols that it needs will be resolvable without having to
5245 search for each symbol reference.
5246
5247 The symbol versioning is in effect a much more sophisticated way of
5248 doing minor version checking that SunOS does. The fundamental problem
5249 that is being addressed here is that typically references to external
5250 functions are bound on an as-needed basis, and are not all bound when
5251 the application starts up. If a shared library is out of date, a
5252 required interface may be missing; when the application tries to use
5253 that interface, it may suddenly and unexpectedly fail. With symbol
5254 versioning, the user will get a warning when they start their program if
5255 the libraries being used with the application are too old.
5256
5257 There are several GNU extensions to Sun's versioning approach. The
5258 first of these is the ability to bind a symbol to a version node in the
5259 source file where the symbol is defined instead of in the versioning
5260 script. This was done mainly to reduce the burden on the library
5261 maintainer. You can do this by putting something like:
5262 @smallexample
5263 __asm__(".symver original_foo,foo@@VERS_1.1");
5264 @end smallexample
5265 @noindent
5266 in the C source file. This renames the function @samp{original_foo} to
5267 be an alias for @samp{foo} bound to the version node @samp{VERS_1.1}.
5268 The @samp{local:} directive can be used to prevent the symbol
5269 @samp{original_foo} from being exported. A @samp{.symver} directive
5270 takes precedence over a version script.
5271
5272 The second GNU extension is to allow multiple versions of the same
5273 function to appear in a given shared library. In this way you can make
5274 an incompatible change to an interface without increasing the major
5275 version number of the shared library, while still allowing applications
5276 linked against the old interface to continue to function.
5277
5278 To do this, you must use multiple @samp{.symver} directives in the
5279 source file. Here is an example:
5280
5281 @smallexample
5282 __asm__(".symver original_foo,foo@@");
5283 __asm__(".symver old_foo,foo@@VERS_1.1");
5284 __asm__(".symver old_foo1,foo@@VERS_1.2");
5285 __asm__(".symver new_foo,foo@@@@VERS_2.0");
5286 @end smallexample
5287
5288 In this example, @samp{foo@@} represents the symbol @samp{foo} bound to the
5289 unspecified base version of the symbol. The source file that contains this
5290 example would define 4 C functions: @samp{original_foo}, @samp{old_foo},
5291 @samp{old_foo1}, and @samp{new_foo}.
5292
5293 When you have multiple definitions of a given symbol, there needs to be
5294 some way to specify a default version to which external references to
5295 this symbol will be bound. You can do this with the
5296 @samp{foo@@@@VERS_2.0} type of @samp{.symver} directive. You can only
5297 declare one version of a symbol as the default in this manner; otherwise
5298 you would effectively have multiple definitions of the same symbol.
5299
5300 If you wish to bind a reference to a specific version of the symbol
5301 within the shared library, you can use the aliases of convenience
5302 (i.e., @samp{old_foo}), or you can use the @samp{.symver} directive to
5303 specifically bind to an external version of the function in question.
5304
5305 You can also specify the language in the version script:
5306
5307 @smallexample
5308 VERSION extern "lang" @{ version-script-commands @}
5309 @end smallexample
5310
5311 The supported @samp{lang}s are @samp{C}, @samp{C++}, and @samp{Java}.
5312 The linker will iterate over the list of symbols at the link time and
5313 demangle them according to @samp{lang} before matching them to the
5314 patterns specified in @samp{version-script-commands}. The default
5315 @samp{lang} is @samp{C}.
5316
5317 Demangled names may contains spaces and other special characters. As
5318 described above, you can use a glob pattern to match demangled names,
5319 or you can use a double-quoted string to match the string exactly. In
5320 the latter case, be aware that minor differences (such as differing
5321 whitespace) between the version script and the demangler output will
5322 cause a mismatch. As the exact string generated by the demangler
5323 might change in the future, even if the mangled name does not, you
5324 should check that all of your version directives are behaving as you
5325 expect when you upgrade.
5326
5327 @node Expressions
5328 @section Expressions in Linker Scripts
5329 @cindex expressions
5330 @cindex arithmetic
5331 The syntax for expressions in the linker script language is identical to
5332 that of C expressions. All expressions are evaluated as integers. All
5333 expressions are evaluated in the same size, which is 32 bits if both the
5334 host and target are 32 bits, and is otherwise 64 bits.
5335
5336 You can use and set symbol values in expressions.
5337
5338 The linker defines several special purpose builtin functions for use in
5339 expressions.
5340
5341 @menu
5342 * Constants:: Constants
5343 * Symbolic Constants:: Symbolic constants
5344 * Symbols:: Symbol Names
5345 * Orphan Sections:: Orphan Sections
5346 * Location Counter:: The Location Counter
5347 * Operators:: Operators
5348 * Evaluation:: Evaluation
5349 * Expression Section:: The Section of an Expression
5350 * Builtin Functions:: Builtin Functions
5351 @end menu
5352
5353 @node Constants
5354 @subsection Constants
5355 @cindex integer notation
5356 @cindex constants in linker scripts
5357 All constants are integers.
5358
5359 As in C, the linker considers an integer beginning with @samp{0} to be
5360 octal, and an integer beginning with @samp{0x} or @samp{0X} to be
5361 hexadecimal. Alternatively the linker accepts suffixes of @samp{h} or
5362 @samp{H} for hexadecimal, @samp{o} or @samp{O} for octal, @samp{b} or
5363 @samp{B} for binary and @samp{d} or @samp{D} for decimal. Any integer
5364 value without a prefix or a suffix is considered to be decimal.
5365
5366 @cindex scaled integers
5367 @cindex K and M integer suffixes
5368 @cindex M and K integer suffixes
5369 @cindex suffixes for integers
5370 @cindex integer suffixes
5371 In addition, you can use the suffixes @code{K} and @code{M} to scale a
5372 constant by
5373 @c TEXI2ROFF-KILL
5374 @ifnottex
5375 @c END TEXI2ROFF-KILL
5376 @code{1024} or @code{1024*1024}
5377 @c TEXI2ROFF-KILL
5378 @end ifnottex
5379 @tex
5380 ${\rm 1024}$ or ${\rm 1024}^2$
5381 @end tex
5382 @c END TEXI2ROFF-KILL
5383 respectively. For example, the following
5384 all refer to the same quantity:
5385
5386 @smallexample
5387 _fourk_1 = 4K;
5388 _fourk_2 = 4096;
5389 _fourk_3 = 0x1000;
5390 _fourk_4 = 10000o;
5391 @end smallexample
5392
5393 Note - the @code{K} and @code{M} suffixes cannot be used in
5394 conjunction with the base suffixes mentioned above.
5395
5396 @node Symbolic Constants
5397 @subsection Symbolic Constants
5398 @cindex symbolic constants
5399 @kindex CONSTANT
5400 It is possible to refer to target specific constants via the use of
5401 the @code{CONSTANT(@var{name})} operator, where @var{name} is one of:
5402
5403 @table @code
5404 @item MAXPAGESIZE
5405 @kindex MAXPAGESIZE
5406 The target's maximum page size.
5407
5408 @item COMMONPAGESIZE
5409 @kindex COMMONPAGESIZE
5410 The target's default page size.
5411 @end table
5412
5413 So for example:
5414
5415 @smallexample
5416 .text ALIGN (CONSTANT (MAXPAGESIZE)) : @{ *(.text) @}
5417 @end smallexample
5418
5419 will create a text section aligned to the largest page boundary
5420 supported by the target.
5421
5422 @node Symbols
5423 @subsection Symbol Names
5424 @cindex symbol names
5425 @cindex names
5426 @cindex quoted symbol names
5427 @kindex "
5428 Unless quoted, symbol names start with a letter, underscore, or period
5429 and may include letters, digits, underscores, periods, and hyphens.
5430 Unquoted symbol names must not conflict with any keywords. You can
5431 specify a symbol which contains odd characters or has the same name as a
5432 keyword by surrounding the symbol name in double quotes:
5433 @smallexample
5434 "SECTION" = 9;
5435 "with a space" = "also with a space" + 10;
5436 @end smallexample
5437
5438 Since symbols can contain many non-alphabetic characters, it is safest
5439 to delimit symbols with spaces. For example, @samp{A-B} is one symbol,
5440 whereas @samp{A - B} is an expression involving subtraction.
5441
5442 @node Orphan Sections
5443 @subsection Orphan Sections
5444 @cindex orphan
5445 Orphan sections are sections present in the input files which
5446 are not explicitly placed into the output file by the linker
5447 script. The linker will still copy these sections into the
5448 output file, but it has to guess as to where they should be
5449 placed. The linker uses a simple heuristic to do this. It
5450 attempts to place orphan sections after non-orphan sections of the
5451 same attribute, such as code vs data, loadable vs non-loadable, etc.
5452 If there is not enough room to do this then it places
5453 at the end of the file.
5454
5455 For ELF targets, the attribute of the section includes section type as
5456 well as section flag.
5457
5458 If an orphaned section's name is representable as a C identifier then
5459 the linker will automatically @pxref{PROVIDE} two symbols:
5460 __start_SECNAME and __stop_SECNAME, where SECNAME is the name of the
5461 section. These indicate the start address and end address of the
5462 orphaned section respectively. Note: most section names are not
5463 representable as C identifiers because they contain a @samp{.}
5464 character.
5465
5466 @node Location Counter
5467 @subsection The Location Counter
5468 @kindex .
5469 @cindex dot
5470 @cindex location counter
5471 @cindex current output location
5472 The special linker variable @dfn{dot} @samp{.} always contains the
5473 current output location counter. Since the @code{.} always refers to a
5474 location in an output section, it may only appear in an expression
5475 within a @code{SECTIONS} command. The @code{.} symbol may appear
5476 anywhere that an ordinary symbol is allowed in an expression.
5477
5478 @cindex holes
5479 Assigning a value to @code{.} will cause the location counter to be
5480 moved. This may be used to create holes in the output section. The
5481 location counter may not be moved backwards inside an output section,
5482 and may not be moved backwards outside of an output section if so
5483 doing creates areas with overlapping LMAs.
5484
5485 @smallexample
5486 SECTIONS
5487 @{
5488 output :
5489 @{
5490 file1(.text)
5491 . = . + 1000;
5492 file2(.text)
5493 . += 1000;
5494 file3(.text)
5495 @} = 0x12345678;
5496 @}
5497 @end smallexample
5498 @noindent
5499 In the previous example, the @samp{.text} section from @file{file1} is
5500 located at the beginning of the output section @samp{output}. It is
5501 followed by a 1000 byte gap. Then the @samp{.text} section from
5502 @file{file2} appears, also with a 1000 byte gap following before the
5503 @samp{.text} section from @file{file3}. The notation @samp{= 0x12345678}
5504 specifies what data to write in the gaps (@pxref{Output Section Fill}).
5505
5506 @cindex dot inside sections
5507 Note: @code{.} actually refers to the byte offset from the start of the
5508 current containing object. Normally this is the @code{SECTIONS}
5509 statement, whose start address is 0, hence @code{.} can be used as an
5510 absolute address. If @code{.} is used inside a section description
5511 however, it refers to the byte offset from the start of that section,
5512 not an absolute address. Thus in a script like this:
5513
5514 @smallexample
5515 SECTIONS
5516 @{
5517 . = 0x100
5518 .text: @{
5519 *(.text)
5520 . = 0x200
5521 @}
5522 . = 0x500
5523 .data: @{
5524 *(.data)
5525 . += 0x600
5526 @}
5527 @}
5528 @end smallexample
5529
5530 The @samp{.text} section will be assigned a starting address of 0x100
5531 and a size of exactly 0x200 bytes, even if there is not enough data in
5532 the @samp{.text} input sections to fill this area. (If there is too
5533 much data, an error will be produced because this would be an attempt to
5534 move @code{.} backwards). The @samp{.data} section will start at 0x500
5535 and it will have an extra 0x600 bytes worth of space after the end of
5536 the values from the @samp{.data} input sections and before the end of
5537 the @samp{.data} output section itself.
5538
5539 @cindex dot outside sections
5540 Setting symbols to the value of the location counter outside of an
5541 output section statement can result in unexpected values if the linker
5542 needs to place orphan sections. For example, given the following:
5543
5544 @smallexample
5545 SECTIONS
5546 @{
5547 start_of_text = . ;
5548 .text: @{ *(.text) @}
5549 end_of_text = . ;
5550
5551 start_of_data = . ;
5552 .data: @{ *(.data) @}
5553 end_of_data = . ;
5554 @}
5555 @end smallexample
5556
5557 If the linker needs to place some input section, e.g. @code{.rodata},
5558 not mentioned in the script, it might choose to place that section
5559 between @code{.text} and @code{.data}. You might think the linker
5560 should place @code{.rodata} on the blank line in the above script, but
5561 blank lines are of no particular significance to the linker. As well,
5562 the linker doesn't associate the above symbol names with their
5563 sections. Instead, it assumes that all assignments or other
5564 statements belong to the previous output section, except for the
5565 special case of an assignment to @code{.}. I.e., the linker will
5566 place the orphan @code{.rodata} section as if the script was written
5567 as follows:
5568
5569 @smallexample
5570 SECTIONS
5571 @{
5572 start_of_text = . ;
5573 .text: @{ *(.text) @}
5574 end_of_text = . ;
5575
5576 start_of_data = . ;
5577 .rodata: @{ *(.rodata) @}
5578 .data: @{ *(.data) @}
5579 end_of_data = . ;
5580 @}
5581 @end smallexample
5582
5583 This may or may not be the script author's intention for the value of
5584 @code{start_of_data}. One way to influence the orphan section
5585 placement is to assign the location counter to itself, as the linker
5586 assumes that an assignment to @code{.} is setting the start address of
5587 a following output section and thus should be grouped with that
5588 section. So you could write:
5589
5590 @smallexample
5591 SECTIONS
5592 @{
5593 start_of_text = . ;
5594 .text: @{ *(.text) @}
5595 end_of_text = . ;
5596
5597 . = . ;
5598 start_of_data = . ;
5599 .data: @{ *(.data) @}
5600 end_of_data = . ;
5601 @}
5602 @end smallexample
5603
5604 Now, the orphan @code{.rodata} section will be placed between
5605 @code{end_of_text} and @code{start_of_data}.
5606
5607 @need 2000
5608 @node Operators
5609 @subsection Operators
5610 @cindex operators for arithmetic
5611 @cindex arithmetic operators
5612 @cindex precedence in expressions
5613 The linker recognizes the standard C set of arithmetic operators, with
5614 the standard bindings and precedence levels:
5615 @c TEXI2ROFF-KILL
5616 @ifnottex
5617 @c END TEXI2ROFF-KILL
5618 @smallexample
5619 precedence associativity Operators Notes
5620 (highest)
5621 1 left ! - ~ (1)
5622 2 left * / %
5623 3 left + -
5624 4 left >> <<
5625 5 left == != > < <= >=
5626 6 left &
5627 7 left |
5628 8 left &&
5629 9 left ||
5630 10 right ? :
5631 11 right &= += -= *= /= (2)
5632 (lowest)
5633 @end smallexample
5634 Notes:
5635 (1) Prefix operators
5636 (2) @xref{Assignments}.
5637 @c TEXI2ROFF-KILL
5638 @end ifnottex
5639 @tex
5640 \vskip \baselineskip
5641 %"lispnarrowing" is the extra indent used generally for smallexample
5642 \hskip\lispnarrowing\vbox{\offinterlineskip
5643 \hrule
5644 \halign
5645 {\vrule#&\strut\hfil\ #\ \hfil&\vrule#&\strut\hfil\ #\ \hfil&\vrule#&\strut\hfil\ {\tt #}\ \hfil&\vrule#\cr
5646 height2pt&\omit&&\omit&&\omit&\cr
5647 &Precedence&& Associativity &&{\rm Operators}&\cr
5648 height2pt&\omit&&\omit&&\omit&\cr
5649 \noalign{\hrule}
5650 height2pt&\omit&&\omit&&\omit&\cr
5651 &highest&&&&&\cr
5652 % '176 is tilde, '~' in tt font
5653 &1&&left&&\qquad- \char'176\ !\qquad\dag&\cr
5654 &2&&left&&* / \%&\cr
5655 &3&&left&&+ -&\cr
5656 &4&&left&&>> <<&\cr
5657 &5&&left&&== != > < <= >=&\cr
5658 &6&&left&&\&&\cr
5659 &7&&left&&|&\cr
5660 &8&&left&&{\&\&}&\cr
5661 &9&&left&&||&\cr
5662 &10&&right&&? :&\cr
5663 &11&&right&&\qquad\&= += -= *= /=\qquad\ddag&\cr
5664 &lowest&&&&&\cr
5665 height2pt&\omit&&\omit&&\omit&\cr}
5666 \hrule}
5667 @end tex
5668 @iftex
5669 {
5670 @obeylines@parskip=0pt@parindent=0pt
5671 @dag@quad Prefix operators.
5672 @ddag@quad @xref{Assignments}.
5673 }
5674 @end iftex
5675 @c END TEXI2ROFF-KILL
5676
5677 @node Evaluation
5678 @subsection Evaluation
5679 @cindex lazy evaluation
5680 @cindex expression evaluation order
5681 The linker evaluates expressions lazily. It only computes the value of
5682 an expression when absolutely necessary.
5683
5684 The linker needs some information, such as the value of the start
5685 address of the first section, and the origins and lengths of memory
5686 regions, in order to do any linking at all. These values are computed
5687 as soon as possible when the linker reads in the linker script.
5688
5689 However, other values (such as symbol values) are not known or needed
5690 until after storage allocation. Such values are evaluated later, when
5691 other information (such as the sizes of output sections) is available
5692 for use in the symbol assignment expression.
5693
5694 The sizes of sections cannot be known until after allocation, so
5695 assignments dependent upon these are not performed until after
5696 allocation.
5697
5698 Some expressions, such as those depending upon the location counter
5699 @samp{.}, must be evaluated during section allocation.
5700
5701 If the result of an expression is required, but the value is not
5702 available, then an error results. For example, a script like the
5703 following
5704 @smallexample
5705 @group
5706 SECTIONS
5707 @{
5708 .text 9+this_isnt_constant :
5709 @{ *(.text) @}
5710 @}
5711 @end group
5712 @end smallexample
5713 @noindent
5714 will cause the error message @samp{non constant expression for initial
5715 address}.
5716
5717 @node Expression Section
5718 @subsection The Section of an Expression
5719 @cindex expression sections
5720 @cindex absolute expressions
5721 @cindex relative expressions
5722 @cindex absolute and relocatable symbols
5723 @cindex relocatable and absolute symbols
5724 @cindex symbols, relocatable and absolute
5725 Addresses and symbols may be section relative, or absolute. A section
5726 relative symbol is relocatable. If you request relocatable output
5727 using the @samp{-r} option, a further link operation may change the
5728 value of a section relative symbol. On the other hand, an absolute
5729 symbol will retain the same value throughout any further link
5730 operations.
5731
5732 Some terms in linker expressions are addresses. This is true of
5733 section relative symbols and for builtin functions that return an
5734 address, such as @code{ADDR}, @code{LOADADDR}, @code{ORIGIN} and
5735 @code{SEGMENT_START}. Other terms are simply numbers, or are builtin
5736 functions that return a non-address value, such as @code{LENGTH}.
5737 One complication is that unless you set @code{LD_FEATURE ("SANE_EXPR")}
5738 (@pxref{Miscellaneous Commands}), numbers and absolute symbols are treated
5739 differently depending on their location, for compatibility with older
5740 versions of @code{ld}. Expressions appearing outside an output
5741 section definition treat all numbers as absolute addresses.
5742 Expressions appearing inside an output section definition treat
5743 absolute symbols as numbers. If @code{LD_FEATURE ("SANE_EXPR")} is
5744 given, then absolute symbols and numbers are simply treated as numbers
5745 everywhere.
5746
5747 In the following simple example,
5748
5749 @smallexample
5750 @group
5751 SECTIONS
5752 @{
5753 . = 0x100;
5754 __executable_start = 0x100;
5755 .data :
5756 @{
5757 . = 0x10;
5758 __data_start = 0x10;
5759 *(.data)
5760 @}
5761 @dots{}
5762 @}
5763 @end group
5764 @end smallexample
5765
5766 both @code{.} and @code{__executable_start} are set to the absolute
5767 address 0x100 in the first two assignments, then both @code{.} and
5768 @code{__data_start} are set to 0x10 relative to the @code{.data}
5769 section in the second two assignments.
5770
5771 For expressions involving numbers, relative addresses and absolute
5772 addresses, ld follows these rules to evaluate terms:
5773
5774 @itemize @bullet
5775 @item
5776 Unary operations on an absolute address or number, and binary
5777 operations on two absolute addresses or two numbers, or between one
5778 absolute address and a number, apply the operator to the value(s).
5779 @item
5780 Unary operations on a relative address, and binary operations on two
5781 relative addresses in the same section or between one relative address
5782 and a number, apply the operator to the offset part of the address(es).
5783 @item
5784 Other binary operations, that is, between two relative addresses not
5785 in the same section, or between a relative address and an absolute
5786 address, first convert any non-absolute term to an absolute address
5787 before applying the operator.
5788 @end itemize
5789
5790 The result section of each sub-expression is as follows:
5791
5792 @itemize @bullet
5793 @item
5794 An operation involving only numbers results in a number.
5795 @item
5796 The result of comparisons, @samp{&&} and @samp{||} is also a number.
5797 @item
5798 The result of other binary arithmetic and logical operations on two
5799 relative addresses in the same section or two absolute addresses
5800 (after above conversions) is also a number.
5801 @item
5802 The result of other operations on relative addresses or one
5803 relative address and a number, is a relative address in the same
5804 section as the relative operand(s).
5805 @item
5806 The result of other operations on absolute addresses (after above
5807 conversions) is an absolute address.
5808 @end itemize
5809
5810 You can use the builtin function @code{ABSOLUTE} to force an expression
5811 to be absolute when it would otherwise be relative. For example, to
5812 create an absolute symbol set to the address of the end of the output
5813 section @samp{.data}:
5814 @smallexample
5815 SECTIONS
5816 @{
5817 .data : @{ *(.data) _edata = ABSOLUTE(.); @}
5818 @}
5819 @end smallexample
5820 @noindent
5821 If @samp{ABSOLUTE} were not used, @samp{_edata} would be relative to the
5822 @samp{.data} section.
5823
5824 Using @code{LOADADDR} also forces an expression absolute, since this
5825 particular builtin function returns an absolute address.
5826
5827 @node Builtin Functions
5828 @subsection Builtin Functions
5829 @cindex functions in expressions
5830 The linker script language includes a number of builtin functions for
5831 use in linker script expressions.
5832
5833 @table @code
5834 @item ABSOLUTE(@var{exp})
5835 @kindex ABSOLUTE(@var{exp})
5836 @cindex expression, absolute
5837 Return the absolute (non-relocatable, as opposed to non-negative) value
5838 of the expression @var{exp}. Primarily useful to assign an absolute
5839 value to a symbol within a section definition, where symbol values are
5840 normally section relative. @xref{Expression Section}.
5841
5842 @item ADDR(@var{section})
5843 @kindex ADDR(@var{section})
5844 @cindex section address in expression
5845 Return the address (VMA) of the named @var{section}. Your
5846 script must previously have defined the location of that section. In
5847 the following example, @code{start_of_output_1}, @code{symbol_1} and
5848 @code{symbol_2} are assigned equivalent values, except that
5849 @code{symbol_1} will be relative to the @code{.output1} section while
5850 the other two will be absolute:
5851 @smallexample
5852 @group
5853 SECTIONS @{ @dots{}
5854 .output1 :
5855 @{
5856 start_of_output_1 = ABSOLUTE(.);
5857 @dots{}
5858 @}
5859 .output :
5860 @{
5861 symbol_1 = ADDR(.output1);
5862 symbol_2 = start_of_output_1;
5863 @}
5864 @dots{} @}
5865 @end group
5866 @end smallexample
5867
5868 @item ALIGN(@var{align})
5869 @itemx ALIGN(@var{exp},@var{align})
5870 @kindex ALIGN(@var{align})
5871 @kindex ALIGN(@var{exp},@var{align})
5872 @cindex round up location counter
5873 @cindex align location counter
5874 @cindex round up expression
5875 @cindex align expression
5876 Return the location counter (@code{.}) or arbitrary expression aligned
5877 to the next @var{align} boundary. The single operand @code{ALIGN}
5878 doesn't change the value of the location counter---it just does
5879 arithmetic on it. The two operand @code{ALIGN} allows an arbitrary
5880 expression to be aligned upwards (@code{ALIGN(@var{align})} is
5881 equivalent to @code{ALIGN(., @var{align})}).
5882
5883 Here is an example which aligns the output @code{.data} section to the
5884 next @code{0x2000} byte boundary after the preceding section and sets a
5885 variable within the section to the next @code{0x8000} boundary after the
5886 input sections:
5887 @smallexample
5888 @group
5889 SECTIONS @{ @dots{}
5890 .data ALIGN(0x2000): @{
5891 *(.data)
5892 variable = ALIGN(0x8000);
5893 @}
5894 @dots{} @}
5895 @end group
5896 @end smallexample
5897 @noindent
5898 The first use of @code{ALIGN} in this example specifies the location of
5899 a section because it is used as the optional @var{address} attribute of
5900 a section definition (@pxref{Output Section Address}). The second use
5901 of @code{ALIGN} is used to defines the value of a symbol.
5902
5903 The builtin function @code{NEXT} is closely related to @code{ALIGN}.
5904
5905 @item ALIGNOF(@var{section})
5906 @kindex ALIGNOF(@var{section})
5907 @cindex section alignment
5908 Return the alignment in bytes of the named @var{section}, if that section has
5909 been allocated. If the section has not been allocated when this is
5910 evaluated, the linker will report an error. In the following example,
5911 the alignment of the @code{.output} section is stored as the first
5912 value in that section.
5913 @smallexample
5914 @group
5915 SECTIONS@{ @dots{}
5916 .output @{
5917 LONG (ALIGNOF (.output))
5918 @dots{}
5919 @}
5920 @dots{} @}
5921 @end group
5922 @end smallexample
5923
5924 @item BLOCK(@var{exp})
5925 @kindex BLOCK(@var{exp})
5926 This is a synonym for @code{ALIGN}, for compatibility with older linker
5927 scripts. It is most often seen when setting the address of an output
5928 section.
5929
5930 @item DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN(@var{maxpagesize}, @var{commonpagesize})
5931 @kindex DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN(@var{maxpagesize}, @var{commonpagesize})
5932 This is equivalent to either
5933 @smallexample
5934 (ALIGN(@var{maxpagesize}) + (. & (@var{maxpagesize} - 1)))
5935 @end smallexample
5936 or
5937 @smallexample
5938 (ALIGN(@var{maxpagesize}) + (. & (@var{maxpagesize} - @var{commonpagesize})))
5939 @end smallexample
5940 @noindent
5941 depending on whether the latter uses fewer @var{commonpagesize} sized pages
5942 for the data segment (area between the result of this expression and
5943 @code{DATA_SEGMENT_END}) than the former or not.
5944 If the latter form is used, it means @var{commonpagesize} bytes of runtime
5945 memory will be saved at the expense of up to @var{commonpagesize} wasted
5946 bytes in the on-disk file.
5947
5948 This expression can only be used directly in @code{SECTIONS} commands, not in
5949 any output section descriptions and only once in the linker script.
5950 @var{commonpagesize} should be less or equal to @var{maxpagesize} and should
5951 be the system page size the object wants to be optimized for (while still
5952 working on system page sizes up to @var{maxpagesize}).
5953
5954 @noindent
5955 Example:
5956 @smallexample
5957 . = DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN(0x10000, 0x2000);
5958 @end smallexample
5959
5960 @item DATA_SEGMENT_END(@var{exp})
5961 @kindex DATA_SEGMENT_END(@var{exp})
5962 This defines the end of data segment for @code{DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN}
5963 evaluation purposes.
5964
5965 @smallexample
5966 . = DATA_SEGMENT_END(.);
5967 @end smallexample
5968
5969 @item DATA_SEGMENT_RELRO_END(@var{offset}, @var{exp})
5970 @kindex DATA_SEGMENT_RELRO_END(@var{offset}, @var{exp})
5971 This defines the end of the @code{PT_GNU_RELRO} segment when
5972 @samp{-z relro} option is used.
5973 When @samp{-z relro} option is not present, @code{DATA_SEGMENT_RELRO_END}
5974 does nothing, otherwise @code{DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN} is padded so that
5975 @var{exp} + @var{offset} is aligned to the most commonly used page
5976 boundary for particular target. If present in the linker script,
5977 it must always come in between @code{DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN} and
5978 @code{DATA_SEGMENT_END}. Evaluates to the second argument plus any
5979 padding needed at the end of the @code{PT_GNU_RELRO} segment due to
5980 section alignment.
5981
5982 @smallexample
5983 . = DATA_SEGMENT_RELRO_END(24, .);
5984 @end smallexample
5985
5986 @item DEFINED(@var{symbol})
5987 @kindex DEFINED(@var{symbol})
5988 @cindex symbol defaults
5989 Return 1 if @var{symbol} is in the linker global symbol table and is
5990 defined before the statement using DEFINED in the script, otherwise
5991 return 0. You can use this function to provide
5992 default values for symbols. For example, the following script fragment
5993 shows how to set a global symbol @samp{begin} to the first location in
5994 the @samp{.text} section---but if a symbol called @samp{begin} already
5995 existed, its value is preserved:
5996
5997 @smallexample
5998 @group
5999 SECTIONS @{ @dots{}
6000 .text : @{
6001 begin = DEFINED(begin) ? begin : . ;
6002 @dots{}
6003 @}
6004 @dots{}
6005 @}
6006 @end group
6007 @end smallexample
6008
6009 @item LENGTH(@var{memory})
6010 @kindex LENGTH(@var{memory})
6011 Return the length of the memory region named @var{memory}.
6012
6013 @item LOADADDR(@var{section})
6014 @kindex LOADADDR(@var{section})
6015 @cindex section load address in expression
6016 Return the absolute LMA of the named @var{section}. (@pxref{Output
6017 Section LMA}).
6018
6019 @item LOG2CEIL(@var{exp})
6020 @kindex LOG2CEIL(@var{exp})
6021 Return the binary logarithm of @var{exp} rounded towards infinity.
6022 @code{LOG2CEIL(0)} returns 0.
6023
6024 @kindex MAX
6025 @item MAX(@var{exp1}, @var{exp2})
6026 Returns the maximum of @var{exp1} and @var{exp2}.
6027
6028 @kindex MIN
6029 @item MIN(@var{exp1}, @var{exp2})
6030 Returns the minimum of @var{exp1} and @var{exp2}.
6031
6032 @item NEXT(@var{exp})
6033 @kindex NEXT(@var{exp})
6034 @cindex unallocated address, next
6035 Return the next unallocated address that is a multiple of @var{exp}.
6036 This function is closely related to @code{ALIGN(@var{exp})}; unless you
6037 use the @code{MEMORY} command to define discontinuous memory for the
6038 output file, the two functions are equivalent.
6039
6040 @item ORIGIN(@var{memory})
6041 @kindex ORIGIN(@var{memory})
6042 Return the origin of the memory region named @var{memory}.
6043
6044 @item SEGMENT_START(@var{segment}, @var{default})
6045 @kindex SEGMENT_START(@var{segment}, @var{default})
6046 Return the base address of the named @var{segment}. If an explicit
6047 value has already been given for this segment (with a command-line
6048 @samp{-T} option) then that value will be returned otherwise the value
6049 will be @var{default}. At present, the @samp{-T} command-line option
6050 can only be used to set the base address for the ``text'', ``data'', and
6051 ``bss'' sections, but you can use @code{SEGMENT_START} with any segment
6052 name.
6053
6054 @item SIZEOF(@var{section})
6055 @kindex SIZEOF(@var{section})
6056 @cindex section size
6057 Return the size in bytes of the named @var{section}, if that section has
6058 been allocated. If the section has not been allocated when this is
6059 evaluated, the linker will report an error. In the following example,
6060 @code{symbol_1} and @code{symbol_2} are assigned identical values:
6061 @smallexample
6062 @group
6063 SECTIONS@{ @dots{}
6064 .output @{
6065 .start = . ;
6066 @dots{}
6067 .end = . ;
6068 @}
6069 symbol_1 = .end - .start ;
6070 symbol_2 = SIZEOF(.output);
6071 @dots{} @}
6072 @end group
6073 @end smallexample
6074
6075 @item SIZEOF_HEADERS
6076 @itemx sizeof_headers
6077 @kindex SIZEOF_HEADERS
6078 @cindex header size
6079 Return the size in bytes of the output file's headers. This is
6080 information which appears at the start of the output file. You can use
6081 this number when setting the start address of the first section, if you
6082 choose, to facilitate paging.
6083
6084 @cindex not enough room for program headers
6085 @cindex program headers, not enough room
6086 When producing an ELF output file, if the linker script uses the
6087 @code{SIZEOF_HEADERS} builtin function, the linker must compute the
6088 number of program headers before it has determined all the section
6089 addresses and sizes. If the linker later discovers that it needs
6090 additional program headers, it will report an error @samp{not enough
6091 room for program headers}. To avoid this error, you must avoid using
6092 the @code{SIZEOF_HEADERS} function, or you must rework your linker
6093 script to avoid forcing the linker to use additional program headers, or
6094 you must define the program headers yourself using the @code{PHDRS}
6095 command (@pxref{PHDRS}).
6096 @end table
6097
6098 @node Implicit Linker Scripts
6099 @section Implicit Linker Scripts
6100 @cindex implicit linker scripts
6101 If you specify a linker input file which the linker can not recognize as
6102 an object file or an archive file, it will try to read the file as a
6103 linker script. If the file can not be parsed as a linker script, the
6104 linker will report an error.
6105
6106 An implicit linker script will not replace the default linker script.
6107
6108 Typically an implicit linker script would contain only symbol
6109 assignments, or the @code{INPUT}, @code{GROUP}, or @code{VERSION}
6110 commands.
6111
6112 Any input files read because of an implicit linker script will be read
6113 at the position in the command line where the implicit linker script was
6114 read. This can affect archive searching.
6115
6116 @ifset GENERIC
6117 @node Machine Dependent
6118 @chapter Machine Dependent Features
6119
6120 @cindex machine dependencies
6121 @command{ld} has additional features on some platforms; the following
6122 sections describe them. Machines where @command{ld} has no additional
6123 functionality are not listed.
6124
6125 @menu
6126 @ifset H8300
6127 * H8/300:: @command{ld} and the H8/300
6128 @end ifset
6129 @ifset I960
6130 * i960:: @command{ld} and the Intel 960 family
6131 @end ifset
6132 @ifset M68HC11
6133 * M68HC11/68HC12:: @code{ld} and the Motorola 68HC11 and 68HC12 families
6134 @end ifset
6135 @ifset ARM
6136 * ARM:: @command{ld} and the ARM family
6137 @end ifset
6138 @ifset HPPA
6139 * HPPA ELF32:: @command{ld} and HPPA 32-bit ELF
6140 @end ifset
6141 @ifset M68K
6142 * M68K:: @command{ld} and the Motorola 68K family
6143 @end ifset
6144 @ifset MIPS
6145 * MIPS:: @command{ld} and the MIPS family
6146 @end ifset
6147 @ifset MMIX
6148 * MMIX:: @command{ld} and MMIX
6149 @end ifset
6150 @ifset MSP430
6151 * MSP430:: @command{ld} and MSP430
6152 @end ifset
6153 @ifset NDS32
6154 * NDS32:: @command{ld} and NDS32
6155 @end ifset
6156 @ifset NIOSII
6157 * Nios II:: @command{ld} and the Altera Nios II
6158 @end ifset
6159 @ifset POWERPC
6160 * PowerPC ELF32:: @command{ld} and PowerPC 32-bit ELF Support
6161 @end ifset
6162 @ifset POWERPC64
6163 * PowerPC64 ELF64:: @command{ld} and PowerPC64 64-bit ELF Support
6164 @end ifset
6165 @ifset SPU
6166 * SPU ELF:: @command{ld} and SPU ELF Support
6167 @end ifset
6168 @ifset TICOFF
6169 * TI COFF:: @command{ld} and TI COFF
6170 @end ifset
6171 @ifset WIN32
6172 * WIN32:: @command{ld} and WIN32 (cygwin/mingw)
6173 @end ifset
6174 @ifset XTENSA
6175 * Xtensa:: @command{ld} and Xtensa Processors
6176 @end ifset
6177 @end menu
6178 @end ifset
6179
6180 @ifset H8300
6181 @ifclear GENERIC
6182 @raisesections
6183 @end ifclear
6184
6185 @node H8/300
6186 @section @command{ld} and the H8/300
6187
6188 @cindex H8/300 support
6189 For the H8/300, @command{ld} can perform these global optimizations when
6190 you specify the @samp{--relax} command-line option.
6191
6192 @table @emph
6193 @cindex relaxing on H8/300
6194 @item relaxing address modes
6195 @command{ld} finds all @code{jsr} and @code{jmp} instructions whose
6196 targets are within eight bits, and turns them into eight-bit
6197 program-counter relative @code{bsr} and @code{bra} instructions,
6198 respectively.
6199
6200 @cindex synthesizing on H8/300
6201 @item synthesizing instructions
6202 @c FIXME: specifically mov.b, or any mov instructions really? -> mov.b only, at least on H8, H8H, H8S
6203 @command{ld} finds all @code{mov.b} instructions which use the
6204 sixteen-bit absolute address form, but refer to the top
6205 page of memory, and changes them to use the eight-bit address form.
6206 (That is: the linker turns @samp{mov.b @code{@@}@var{aa}:16} into
6207 @samp{mov.b @code{@@}@var{aa}:8} whenever the address @var{aa} is in the
6208 top page of memory).
6209
6210 @command{ld} finds all @code{mov} instructions which use the register
6211 indirect with 32-bit displacement addressing mode, but use a small
6212 displacement inside 16-bit displacement range, and changes them to use
6213 the 16-bit displacement form. (That is: the linker turns @samp{mov.b
6214 @code{@@}@var{d}:32,ERx} into @samp{mov.b @code{@@}@var{d}:16,ERx}
6215 whenever the displacement @var{d} is in the 16 bit signed integer
6216 range. Only implemented in ELF-format ld).
6217
6218 @item bit manipulation instructions
6219 @command{ld} finds all bit manipulation instructions like @code{band, bclr,
6220 biand, bild, bior, bist, bixor, bld, bnot, bor, bset, bst, btst, bxor}
6221 which use 32 bit and 16 bit absolute address form, but refer to the top
6222 page of memory, and changes them to use the 8 bit address form.
6223 (That is: the linker turns @samp{bset #xx:3,@code{@@}@var{aa}:32} into
6224 @samp{bset #xx:3,@code{@@}@var{aa}:8} whenever the address @var{aa} is in
6225 the top page of memory).
6226
6227 @item system control instructions
6228 @command{ld} finds all @code{ldc.w, stc.w} instructions which use the
6229 32 bit absolute address form, but refer to the top page of memory, and
6230 changes them to use 16 bit address form.
6231 (That is: the linker turns @samp{ldc.w @code{@@}@var{aa}:32,ccr} into
6232 @samp{ldc.w @code{@@}@var{aa}:16,ccr} whenever the address @var{aa} is in
6233 the top page of memory).
6234 @end table
6235
6236 @ifclear GENERIC
6237 @lowersections
6238 @end ifclear
6239 @end ifset
6240
6241 @ifclear GENERIC
6242 @ifset Renesas
6243 @c This stuff is pointless to say unless you're especially concerned
6244 @c with Renesas chips; don't enable it for generic case, please.
6245 @node Renesas
6246 @chapter @command{ld} and Other Renesas Chips
6247
6248 @command{ld} also supports the Renesas (formerly Hitachi) H8/300H,
6249 H8/500, and SH chips. No special features, commands, or command-line
6250 options are required for these chips.
6251 @end ifset
6252 @end ifclear
6253
6254 @ifset I960
6255 @ifclear GENERIC
6256 @raisesections
6257 @end ifclear
6258
6259 @node i960
6260 @section @command{ld} and the Intel 960 Family
6261
6262 @cindex i960 support
6263
6264 You can use the @samp{-A@var{architecture}} command line option to
6265 specify one of the two-letter names identifying members of the 960
6266 family; the option specifies the desired output target, and warns of any
6267 incompatible instructions in the input files. It also modifies the
6268 linker's search strategy for archive libraries, to support the use of
6269 libraries specific to each particular architecture, by including in the
6270 search loop names suffixed with the string identifying the architecture.
6271
6272 For example, if your @command{ld} command line included @w{@samp{-ACA}} as
6273 well as @w{@samp{-ltry}}, the linker would look (in its built-in search
6274 paths, and in any paths you specify with @samp{-L}) for a library with
6275 the names
6276
6277 @smallexample
6278 @group
6279 try
6280 libtry.a
6281 tryca
6282 libtryca.a
6283 @end group
6284 @end smallexample
6285
6286 @noindent
6287 The first two possibilities would be considered in any event; the last
6288 two are due to the use of @w{@samp{-ACA}}.
6289
6290 You can meaningfully use @samp{-A} more than once on a command line, since
6291 the 960 architecture family allows combination of target architectures; each
6292 use will add another pair of name variants to search for when @w{@samp{-l}}
6293 specifies a library.
6294
6295 @cindex @option{--relax} on i960
6296 @cindex relaxing on i960
6297 @command{ld} supports the @samp{--relax} option for the i960 family. If
6298 you specify @samp{--relax}, @command{ld} finds all @code{balx} and
6299 @code{calx} instructions whose targets are within 24 bits, and turns
6300 them into 24-bit program-counter relative @code{bal} and @code{cal}
6301 instructions, respectively. @command{ld} also turns @code{cal}
6302 instructions into @code{bal} instructions when it determines that the
6303 target subroutine is a leaf routine (that is, the target subroutine does
6304 not itself call any subroutines).
6305
6306 @ifclear GENERIC
6307 @lowersections
6308 @end ifclear
6309 @end ifset
6310
6311 @ifset ARM
6312 @ifclear GENERIC
6313 @raisesections
6314 @end ifclear
6315
6316 @ifset M68HC11
6317 @ifclear GENERIC
6318 @raisesections
6319 @end ifclear
6320
6321 @node M68HC11/68HC12
6322 @section @command{ld} and the Motorola 68HC11 and 68HC12 families
6323
6324 @cindex M68HC11 and 68HC12 support
6325
6326 @subsection Linker Relaxation
6327
6328 For the Motorola 68HC11, @command{ld} can perform these global
6329 optimizations when you specify the @samp{--relax} command-line option.
6330
6331 @table @emph
6332 @cindex relaxing on M68HC11
6333 @item relaxing address modes
6334 @command{ld} finds all @code{jsr} and @code{jmp} instructions whose
6335 targets are within eight bits, and turns them into eight-bit
6336 program-counter relative @code{bsr} and @code{bra} instructions,
6337 respectively.
6338
6339 @command{ld} also looks at all 16-bit extended addressing modes and
6340 transforms them in a direct addressing mode when the address is in
6341 page 0 (between 0 and 0x0ff).
6342
6343 @item relaxing gcc instruction group
6344 When @command{gcc} is called with @option{-mrelax}, it can emit group
6345 of instructions that the linker can optimize to use a 68HC11 direct
6346 addressing mode. These instructions consists of @code{bclr} or
6347 @code{bset} instructions.
6348
6349 @end table
6350
6351 @subsection Trampoline Generation
6352
6353 @cindex trampoline generation on M68HC11
6354 @cindex trampoline generation on M68HC12
6355 For 68HC11 and 68HC12, @command{ld} can generate trampoline code to
6356 call a far function using a normal @code{jsr} instruction. The linker
6357 will also change the relocation to some far function to use the
6358 trampoline address instead of the function address. This is typically the
6359 case when a pointer to a function is taken. The pointer will in fact
6360 point to the function trampoline.
6361
6362 @ifclear GENERIC
6363 @lowersections
6364 @end ifclear
6365 @end ifset
6366
6367 @node ARM
6368 @section @command{ld} and the ARM family
6369
6370 @cindex ARM interworking support
6371 @kindex --support-old-code
6372 For the ARM, @command{ld} will generate code stubs to allow functions calls
6373 between ARM and Thumb code. These stubs only work with code that has
6374 been compiled and assembled with the @samp{-mthumb-interwork} command
6375 line option. If it is necessary to link with old ARM object files or
6376 libraries, which have not been compiled with the -mthumb-interwork
6377 option then the @samp{--support-old-code} command line switch should be
6378 given to the linker. This will make it generate larger stub functions
6379 which will work with non-interworking aware ARM code. Note, however,
6380 the linker does not support generating stubs for function calls to
6381 non-interworking aware Thumb code.
6382
6383 @cindex thumb entry point
6384 @cindex entry point, thumb
6385 @kindex --thumb-entry=@var{entry}
6386 The @samp{--thumb-entry} switch is a duplicate of the generic
6387 @samp{--entry} switch, in that it sets the program's starting address.
6388 But it also sets the bottom bit of the address, so that it can be
6389 branched to using a BX instruction, and the program will start
6390 executing in Thumb mode straight away.
6391
6392 @cindex PE import table prefixing
6393 @kindex --use-nul-prefixed-import-tables
6394 The @samp{--use-nul-prefixed-import-tables} switch is specifying, that
6395 the import tables idata4 and idata5 have to be generated with a zero
6396 element prefix for import libraries. This is the old style to generate
6397 import tables. By default this option is turned off.
6398
6399 @cindex BE8
6400 @kindex --be8
6401 The @samp{--be8} switch instructs @command{ld} to generate BE8 format
6402 executables. This option is only valid when linking big-endian objects.
6403 The resulting image will contain big-endian data and little-endian code.
6404
6405 @cindex TARGET1
6406 @kindex --target1-rel
6407 @kindex --target1-abs
6408 The @samp{R_ARM_TARGET1} relocation is typically used for entries in the
6409 @samp{.init_array} section. It is interpreted as either @samp{R_ARM_REL32}
6410 or @samp{R_ARM_ABS32}, depending on the target. The @samp{--target1-rel}
6411 and @samp{--target1-abs} switches override the default.
6412
6413 @cindex TARGET2
6414 @kindex --target2=@var{type}
6415 The @samp{--target2=type} switch overrides the default definition of the
6416 @samp{R_ARM_TARGET2} relocation. Valid values for @samp{type}, their
6417 meanings, and target defaults are as follows:
6418 @table @samp
6419 @item rel
6420 @samp{R_ARM_REL32} (arm*-*-elf, arm*-*-eabi)
6421 @item abs
6422 @samp{R_ARM_ABS32} (arm*-*-symbianelf)
6423 @item got-rel
6424 @samp{R_ARM_GOT_PREL} (arm*-*-linux, arm*-*-*bsd)
6425 @end table
6426
6427 @cindex FIX_V4BX
6428 @kindex --fix-v4bx
6429 The @samp{R_ARM_V4BX} relocation (defined by the ARM AAELF
6430 specification) enables objects compiled for the ARMv4 architecture to be
6431 interworking-safe when linked with other objects compiled for ARMv4t, but
6432 also allows pure ARMv4 binaries to be built from the same ARMv4 objects.
6433
6434 In the latter case, the switch @option{--fix-v4bx} must be passed to the
6435 linker, which causes v4t @code{BX rM} instructions to be rewritten as
6436 @code{MOV PC,rM}, since v4 processors do not have a @code{BX} instruction.
6437
6438 In the former case, the switch should not be used, and @samp{R_ARM_V4BX}
6439 relocations are ignored.
6440
6441 @cindex FIX_V4BX_INTERWORKING
6442 @kindex --fix-v4bx-interworking
6443 Replace @code{BX rM} instructions identified by @samp{R_ARM_V4BX}
6444 relocations with a branch to the following veneer:
6445
6446 @smallexample
6447 TST rM, #1
6448 MOVEQ PC, rM
6449 BX Rn
6450 @end smallexample
6451
6452 This allows generation of libraries/applications that work on ARMv4 cores
6453 and are still interworking safe. Note that the above veneer clobbers the
6454 condition flags, so may cause incorrect program behavior in rare cases.
6455
6456 @cindex USE_BLX
6457 @kindex --use-blx
6458 The @samp{--use-blx} switch enables the linker to use ARM/Thumb
6459 BLX instructions (available on ARMv5t and above) in various
6460 situations. Currently it is used to perform calls via the PLT from Thumb
6461 code using BLX rather than using BX and a mode-switching stub before
6462 each PLT entry. This should lead to such calls executing slightly faster.
6463
6464 This option is enabled implicitly for SymbianOS, so there is no need to
6465 specify it if you are using that target.
6466
6467 @cindex VFP11_DENORM_FIX
6468 @kindex --vfp11-denorm-fix
6469 The @samp{--vfp11-denorm-fix} switch enables a link-time workaround for a
6470 bug in certain VFP11 coprocessor hardware, which sometimes allows
6471 instructions with denorm operands (which must be handled by support code)
6472 to have those operands overwritten by subsequent instructions before
6473 the support code can read the intended values.
6474
6475 The bug may be avoided in scalar mode if you allow at least one
6476 intervening instruction between a VFP11 instruction which uses a register
6477 and another instruction which writes to the same register, or at least two
6478 intervening instructions if vector mode is in use. The bug only affects
6479 full-compliance floating-point mode: you do not need this workaround if
6480 you are using "runfast" mode. Please contact ARM for further details.
6481
6482 If you know you are using buggy VFP11 hardware, you can
6483 enable this workaround by specifying the linker option
6484 @samp{--vfp-denorm-fix=scalar} if you are using the VFP11 scalar
6485 mode only, or @samp{--vfp-denorm-fix=vector} if you are using
6486 vector mode (the latter also works for scalar code). The default is
6487 @samp{--vfp-denorm-fix=none}.
6488
6489 If the workaround is enabled, instructions are scanned for
6490 potentially-troublesome sequences, and a veneer is created for each
6491 such sequence which may trigger the erratum. The veneer consists of the
6492 first instruction of the sequence and a branch back to the subsequent
6493 instruction. The original instruction is then replaced with a branch to
6494 the veneer. The extra cycles required to call and return from the veneer
6495 are sufficient to avoid the erratum in both the scalar and vector cases.
6496
6497 @cindex ARM1176 erratum workaround
6498 @kindex --fix-arm1176
6499 @kindex --no-fix-arm1176
6500 The @samp{--fix-arm1176} switch enables a link-time workaround for an erratum
6501 in certain ARM1176 processors. The workaround is enabled by default if you
6502 are targeting ARM v6 (excluding ARM v6T2) or earlier. It can be disabled
6503 unconditionally by specifying @samp{--no-fix-arm1176}.
6504
6505 Further information is available in the ``ARM1176JZ-S and ARM1176JZF-S
6506 Programmer Advice Notice'' available on the ARM documentation website at:
6507 http://infocenter.arm.com/.
6508
6509 @cindex NO_ENUM_SIZE_WARNING
6510 @kindex --no-enum-size-warning
6511 The @option{--no-enum-size-warning} switch prevents the linker from
6512 warning when linking object files that specify incompatible EABI
6513 enumeration size attributes. For example, with this switch enabled,
6514 linking of an object file using 32-bit enumeration values with another
6515 using enumeration values fitted into the smallest possible space will
6516 not be diagnosed.
6517
6518 @cindex NO_WCHAR_SIZE_WARNING
6519 @kindex --no-wchar-size-warning
6520 The @option{--no-wchar-size-warning} switch prevents the linker from
6521 warning when linking object files that specify incompatible EABI
6522 @code{wchar_t} size attributes. For example, with this switch enabled,
6523 linking of an object file using 32-bit @code{wchar_t} values with another
6524 using 16-bit @code{wchar_t} values will not be diagnosed.
6525
6526 @cindex PIC_VENEER
6527 @kindex --pic-veneer
6528 The @samp{--pic-veneer} switch makes the linker use PIC sequences for
6529 ARM/Thumb interworking veneers, even if the rest of the binary
6530 is not PIC. This avoids problems on uClinux targets where
6531 @samp{--emit-relocs} is used to generate relocatable binaries.
6532
6533 @cindex STUB_GROUP_SIZE
6534 @kindex --stub-group-size=@var{N}
6535 The linker will automatically generate and insert small sequences of
6536 code into a linked ARM ELF executable whenever an attempt is made to
6537 perform a function call to a symbol that is too far away. The
6538 placement of these sequences of instructions - called stubs - is
6539 controlled by the command line option @option{--stub-group-size=N}.
6540 The placement is important because a poor choice can create a need for
6541 duplicate stubs, increasing the code size. The linker will try to
6542 group stubs together in order to reduce interruptions to the flow of
6543 code, but it needs guidance as to how big these groups should be and
6544 where they should be placed.
6545
6546 The value of @samp{N}, the parameter to the
6547 @option{--stub-group-size=} option controls where the stub groups are
6548 placed. If it is negative then all stubs are placed after the first
6549 branch that needs them. If it is positive then the stubs can be
6550 placed either before or after the branches that need them. If the
6551 value of @samp{N} is 1 (either +1 or -1) then the linker will choose
6552 exactly where to place groups of stubs, using its built in heuristics.
6553 A value of @samp{N} greater than 1 (or smaller than -1) tells the
6554 linker that a single group of stubs can service at most @samp{N} bytes
6555 from the input sections.
6556
6557 The default, if @option{--stub-group-size=} is not specified, is
6558 @samp{N = +1}.
6559
6560 Farcalls stubs insertion is fully supported for the ARM-EABI target
6561 only, because it relies on object files properties not present
6562 otherwise.
6563
6564 @cindex Cortex-A8 erratum workaround
6565 @kindex --fix-cortex-a8
6566 @kindex --no-fix-cortex-a8
6567 The @samp{--fix-cortex-a8} switch enables a link-time workaround for an erratum in certain Cortex-A8 processors. The workaround is enabled by default if you are targeting the ARM v7-A architecture profile. It can be enabled otherwise by specifying @samp{--fix-cortex-a8}, or disabled unconditionally by specifying @samp{--no-fix-cortex-a8}.
6568
6569 The erratum only affects Thumb-2 code. Please contact ARM for further details.
6570
6571 @kindex --merge-exidx-entries
6572 @kindex --no-merge-exidx-entries
6573 @cindex Merging exidx entries
6574 The @samp{--no-merge-exidx-entries} switch disables the merging of adjacent exidx entries in debuginfo.
6575
6576 @kindex --long-plt
6577 @cindex 32-bit PLT entries
6578 The @samp{--long-plt} option enables the use of 16 byte PLT entries
6579 which support up to 4Gb of code. The default is to use 12 byte PLT
6580 entries which only support 512Mb of code.
6581
6582 @ifclear GENERIC
6583 @lowersections
6584 @end ifclear
6585 @end ifset
6586
6587 @ifset HPPA
6588 @ifclear GENERIC
6589 @raisesections
6590 @end ifclear
6591
6592 @node HPPA ELF32
6593 @section @command{ld} and HPPA 32-bit ELF Support
6594 @cindex HPPA multiple sub-space stubs
6595 @kindex --multi-subspace
6596 When generating a shared library, @command{ld} will by default generate
6597 import stubs suitable for use with a single sub-space application.
6598 The @samp{--multi-subspace} switch causes @command{ld} to generate export
6599 stubs, and different (larger) import stubs suitable for use with
6600 multiple sub-spaces.
6601
6602 @cindex HPPA stub grouping
6603 @kindex --stub-group-size=@var{N}
6604 Long branch stubs and import/export stubs are placed by @command{ld} in
6605 stub sections located between groups of input sections.
6606 @samp{--stub-group-size} specifies the maximum size of a group of input
6607 sections handled by one stub section. Since branch offsets are signed,
6608 a stub section may serve two groups of input sections, one group before
6609 the stub section, and one group after it. However, when using
6610 conditional branches that require stubs, it may be better (for branch
6611 prediction) that stub sections only serve one group of input sections.
6612 A negative value for @samp{N} chooses this scheme, ensuring that
6613 branches to stubs always use a negative offset. Two special values of
6614 @samp{N} are recognized, @samp{1} and @samp{-1}. These both instruct
6615 @command{ld} to automatically size input section groups for the branch types
6616 detected, with the same behaviour regarding stub placement as other
6617 positive or negative values of @samp{N} respectively.
6618
6619 Note that @samp{--stub-group-size} does not split input sections. A
6620 single input section larger than the group size specified will of course
6621 create a larger group (of one section). If input sections are too
6622 large, it may not be possible for a branch to reach its stub.
6623
6624 @ifclear GENERIC
6625 @lowersections
6626 @end ifclear
6627 @end ifset
6628
6629 @ifset M68K
6630 @ifclear GENERIC
6631 @raisesections
6632 @end ifclear
6633
6634 @node M68K
6635 @section @command{ld} and the Motorola 68K family
6636
6637 @cindex Motorola 68K GOT generation
6638 @kindex --got=@var{type}
6639 The @samp{--got=@var{type}} option lets you choose the GOT generation scheme.
6640 The choices are @samp{single}, @samp{negative}, @samp{multigot} and
6641 @samp{target}. When @samp{target} is selected the linker chooses
6642 the default GOT generation scheme for the current target.
6643 @samp{single} tells the linker to generate a single GOT with
6644 entries only at non-negative offsets.
6645 @samp{negative} instructs the linker to generate a single GOT with
6646 entries at both negative and positive offsets. Not all environments
6647 support such GOTs.
6648 @samp{multigot} allows the linker to generate several GOTs in the
6649 output file. All GOT references from a single input object
6650 file access the same GOT, but references from different input object
6651 files might access different GOTs. Not all environments support such GOTs.
6652
6653 @ifclear GENERIC
6654 @lowersections
6655 @end ifclear
6656 @end ifset
6657
6658 @ifset MIPS
6659 @ifclear GENERIC
6660 @raisesections
6661 @end ifclear
6662
6663 @node MIPS
6664 @section @command{ld} and the MIPS family
6665
6666 @cindex MIPS microMIPS instruction choice selection
6667 @kindex --insn32
6668 @kindex --no-insn32
6669 The @samp{--insn32} and @samp{--no-insn32} options control the choice of
6670 microMIPS instructions used in code generated by the linker, such as that
6671 in the PLT or lazy binding stubs, or in relaxation. If @samp{--insn32} is
6672 used, then the linker only uses 32-bit instruction encodings. By default
6673 or if @samp{--no-insn32} is used, all instruction encodings are used,
6674 including 16-bit ones where possible.
6675
6676 @ifclear GENERIC
6677 @lowersections
6678 @end ifclear
6679 @end ifset
6680
6681 @ifset MMIX
6682 @ifclear GENERIC
6683 @raisesections
6684 @end ifclear
6685
6686 @node MMIX
6687 @section @code{ld} and MMIX
6688 For MMIX, there is a choice of generating @code{ELF} object files or
6689 @code{mmo} object files when linking. The simulator @code{mmix}
6690 understands the @code{mmo} format. The binutils @code{objcopy} utility
6691 can translate between the two formats.
6692
6693 There is one special section, the @samp{.MMIX.reg_contents} section.
6694 Contents in this section is assumed to correspond to that of global
6695 registers, and symbols referring to it are translated to special symbols,
6696 equal to registers. In a final link, the start address of the
6697 @samp{.MMIX.reg_contents} section corresponds to the first allocated
6698 global register multiplied by 8. Register @code{$255} is not included in
6699 this section; it is always set to the program entry, which is at the
6700 symbol @code{Main} for @code{mmo} files.
6701
6702 Global symbols with the prefix @code{__.MMIX.start.}, for example
6703 @code{__.MMIX.start..text} and @code{__.MMIX.start..data} are special.
6704 The default linker script uses these to set the default start address
6705 of a section.
6706
6707 Initial and trailing multiples of zero-valued 32-bit words in a section,
6708 are left out from an mmo file.
6709
6710 @ifclear GENERIC
6711 @lowersections
6712 @end ifclear
6713 @end ifset
6714
6715 @ifset MSP430
6716 @ifclear GENERIC
6717 @raisesections
6718 @end ifclear
6719
6720 @node MSP430
6721 @section @code{ld} and MSP430
6722 For the MSP430 it is possible to select the MPU architecture. The flag @samp{-m [mpu type]}
6723 will select an appropriate linker script for selected MPU type. (To get a list of known MPUs
6724 just pass @samp{-m help} option to the linker).
6725
6726 @cindex MSP430 extra sections
6727 The linker will recognize some extra sections which are MSP430 specific:
6728
6729 @table @code
6730 @item @samp{.vectors}
6731 Defines a portion of ROM where interrupt vectors located.
6732
6733 @item @samp{.bootloader}
6734 Defines the bootloader portion of the ROM (if applicable). Any code
6735 in this section will be uploaded to the MPU.
6736
6737 @item @samp{.infomem}
6738 Defines an information memory section (if applicable). Any code in
6739 this section will be uploaded to the MPU.
6740
6741 @item @samp{.infomemnobits}
6742 This is the same as the @samp{.infomem} section except that any code
6743 in this section will not be uploaded to the MPU.
6744
6745 @item @samp{.noinit}
6746 Denotes a portion of RAM located above @samp{.bss} section.
6747
6748 The last two sections are used by gcc.
6749 @end table
6750
6751 @ifclear GENERIC
6752 @lowersections
6753 @end ifclear
6754 @end ifset
6755
6756 @ifset NDS32
6757 @ifclear GENERIC
6758 @raisesections
6759 @end ifclear
6760
6761 @node NDS32
6762 @section @code{ld} and NDS32
6763 @kindex relaxing on NDS32
6764 For NDS32, there are some options to select relaxation behavior. The linker
6765 relaxes objects according to these options.
6766
6767 @table @code
6768 @item @samp{--m[no-]fp-as-gp}
6769 Disable/enable fp-as-gp relaxation.
6770
6771 @item @samp{--mexport-symbols=FILE}
6772 Exporting symbols and their address into FILE as linker script.
6773
6774 @item @samp{--m[no-]ex9}
6775 Disable/enable link-time EX9 relaxation.
6776
6777 @item @samp{--mexport-ex9=FILE}
6778 Export the EX9 table after linking.
6779
6780 @item @samp{--mimport-ex9=FILE}
6781 Import the Ex9 table for EX9 relaxation.
6782
6783 @item @samp{--mupdate-ex9}
6784 Update the existing EX9 table.
6785
6786 @item @samp{--mex9-limit=NUM}
6787 Maximum number of entries in the ex9 table.
6788
6789 @item @samp{--mex9-loop-aware}
6790 Avoid generating the EX9 instruction inside the loop.
6791
6792 @item @samp{--m[no-]ifc}
6793 Disable/enable the link-time IFC optimization.
6794
6795 @item @samp{--mifc-loop-aware}
6796 Avoid generating the IFC instruction inside the loop.
6797 @end table
6798
6799 @ifclear GENERIC
6800 @lowersections
6801 @end ifclear
6802 @end ifset
6803
6804 @ifset NIOSII
6805 @ifclear GENERIC
6806 @raisesections
6807 @end ifclear
6808
6809 @node Nios II
6810 @section @command{ld} and the Altera Nios II
6811 @cindex Nios II call relaxation
6812 @kindex --relax on Nios II
6813
6814 Call and immediate jump instructions on Nios II processors are limited to
6815 transferring control to addresses in the same 256MB memory segment,
6816 which may result in @command{ld} giving
6817 @samp{relocation truncated to fit} errors with very large programs.
6818 The command-line option @option{--relax} enables the generation of
6819 trampolines that can access the entire 32-bit address space for calls
6820 outside the normal @code{call} and @code{jmpi} address range. These
6821 trampolines are inserted at section boundaries, so may not themselves
6822 be reachable if an input section and its associated call trampolines are
6823 larger than 256MB.
6824
6825 The @option{--relax} option is enabled by default unless @option{-r}
6826 is also specified. You can disable trampoline generation by using the
6827 @option{--no-relax} linker option. You can also disable this optimization
6828 locally by using the @samp{set .noat} directive in assembly-language
6829 source files, as the linker-inserted trampolines use the @code{at}
6830 register as a temporary.
6831
6832 Note that the linker @option{--relax} option is independent of assembler
6833 relaxation options, and that using the GNU assembler's @option{-relax-all}
6834 option interferes with the linker's more selective call instruction relaxation.
6835
6836 @ifclear GENERIC
6837 @lowersections
6838 @end ifclear
6839 @end ifset
6840
6841 @ifset POWERPC
6842 @ifclear GENERIC
6843 @raisesections
6844 @end ifclear
6845
6846 @node PowerPC ELF32
6847 @section @command{ld} and PowerPC 32-bit ELF Support
6848 @cindex PowerPC long branches
6849 @kindex --relax on PowerPC
6850 Branches on PowerPC processors are limited to a signed 26-bit
6851 displacement, which may result in @command{ld} giving
6852 @samp{relocation truncated to fit} errors with very large programs.
6853 @samp{--relax} enables the generation of trampolines that can access
6854 the entire 32-bit address space. These trampolines are inserted at
6855 section boundaries, so may not themselves be reachable if an input
6856 section exceeds 33M in size. You may combine @samp{-r} and
6857 @samp{--relax} to add trampolines in a partial link. In that case
6858 both branches to undefined symbols and inter-section branches are also
6859 considered potentially out of range, and trampolines inserted.
6860
6861 @cindex PowerPC ELF32 options
6862 @table @option
6863 @cindex PowerPC PLT
6864 @kindex --bss-plt
6865 @item --bss-plt
6866 Current PowerPC GCC accepts a @samp{-msecure-plt} option that
6867 generates code capable of using a newer PLT and GOT layout that has
6868 the security advantage of no executable section ever needing to be
6869 writable and no writable section ever being executable. PowerPC
6870 @command{ld} will generate this layout, including stubs to access the
6871 PLT, if all input files (including startup and static libraries) were
6872 compiled with @samp{-msecure-plt}. @samp{--bss-plt} forces the old
6873 BSS PLT (and GOT layout) which can give slightly better performance.
6874
6875 @kindex --secure-plt
6876 @item --secure-plt
6877 @command{ld} will use the new PLT and GOT layout if it is linking new
6878 @samp{-fpic} or @samp{-fPIC} code, but does not do so automatically
6879 when linking non-PIC code. This option requests the new PLT and GOT
6880 layout. A warning will be given if some object file requires the old
6881 style BSS PLT.
6882
6883 @cindex PowerPC GOT
6884 @kindex --sdata-got
6885 @item --sdata-got
6886 The new secure PLT and GOT are placed differently relative to other
6887 sections compared to older BSS PLT and GOT placement. The location of
6888 @code{.plt} must change because the new secure PLT is an initialized
6889 section while the old PLT is uninitialized. The reason for the
6890 @code{.got} change is more subtle: The new placement allows
6891 @code{.got} to be read-only in applications linked with
6892 @samp{-z relro -z now}. However, this placement means that
6893 @code{.sdata} cannot always be used in shared libraries, because the
6894 PowerPC ABI accesses @code{.sdata} in shared libraries from the GOT
6895 pointer. @samp{--sdata-got} forces the old GOT placement. PowerPC
6896 GCC doesn't use @code{.sdata} in shared libraries, so this option is
6897 really only useful for other compilers that may do so.
6898
6899 @cindex PowerPC stub symbols
6900 @kindex --emit-stub-syms
6901 @item --emit-stub-syms
6902 This option causes @command{ld} to label linker stubs with a local
6903 symbol that encodes the stub type and destination.
6904
6905 @cindex PowerPC TLS optimization
6906 @kindex --no-tls-optimize
6907 @item --no-tls-optimize
6908 PowerPC @command{ld} normally performs some optimization of code
6909 sequences used to access Thread-Local Storage. Use this option to
6910 disable the optimization.
6911 @end table
6912
6913 @ifclear GENERIC
6914 @lowersections
6915 @end ifclear
6916 @end ifset
6917
6918 @ifset POWERPC64
6919 @ifclear GENERIC
6920 @raisesections
6921 @end ifclear
6922
6923 @node PowerPC64 ELF64
6924 @section @command{ld} and PowerPC64 64-bit ELF Support
6925
6926 @cindex PowerPC64 ELF64 options
6927 @table @option
6928 @cindex PowerPC64 stub grouping
6929 @kindex --stub-group-size
6930 @item --stub-group-size
6931 Long branch stubs, PLT call stubs and TOC adjusting stubs are placed
6932 by @command{ld} in stub sections located between groups of input sections.
6933 @samp{--stub-group-size} specifies the maximum size of a group of input
6934 sections handled by one stub section. Since branch offsets are signed,
6935 a stub section may serve two groups of input sections, one group before
6936 the stub section, and one group after it. However, when using
6937 conditional branches that require stubs, it may be better (for branch
6938 prediction) that stub sections only serve one group of input sections.
6939 A negative value for @samp{N} chooses this scheme, ensuring that
6940 branches to stubs always use a negative offset. Two special values of
6941 @samp{N} are recognized, @samp{1} and @samp{-1}. These both instruct
6942 @command{ld} to automatically size input section groups for the branch types
6943 detected, with the same behaviour regarding stub placement as other
6944 positive or negative values of @samp{N} respectively.
6945
6946 Note that @samp{--stub-group-size} does not split input sections. A
6947 single input section larger than the group size specified will of course
6948 create a larger group (of one section). If input sections are too
6949 large, it may not be possible for a branch to reach its stub.
6950
6951 @cindex PowerPC64 stub symbols
6952 @kindex --emit-stub-syms
6953 @item --emit-stub-syms
6954 This option causes @command{ld} to label linker stubs with a local
6955 symbol that encodes the stub type and destination.
6956
6957 @cindex PowerPC64 dot symbols
6958 @kindex --dotsyms
6959 @kindex --no-dotsyms
6960 @item --dotsyms, --no-dotsyms
6961 These two options control how @command{ld} interprets version patterns
6962 in a version script. Older PowerPC64 compilers emitted both a
6963 function descriptor symbol with the same name as the function, and a
6964 code entry symbol with the name prefixed by a dot (@samp{.}). To
6965 properly version a function @samp{foo}, the version script thus needs
6966 to control both @samp{foo} and @samp{.foo}. The option
6967 @samp{--dotsyms}, on by default, automatically adds the required
6968 dot-prefixed patterns. Use @samp{--no-dotsyms} to disable this
6969 feature.
6970
6971 @cindex PowerPC64 TLS optimization
6972 @kindex --no-tls-optimize
6973 @item --no-tls-optimize
6974 PowerPC64 @command{ld} normally performs some optimization of code
6975 sequences used to access Thread-Local Storage. Use this option to
6976 disable the optimization.
6977
6978 @cindex PowerPC64 OPD optimization
6979 @kindex --no-opd-optimize
6980 @item --no-opd-optimize
6981 PowerPC64 @command{ld} normally removes @code{.opd} section entries
6982 corresponding to deleted link-once functions, or functions removed by
6983 the action of @samp{--gc-sections} or linker script @code{/DISCARD/}.
6984 Use this option to disable @code{.opd} optimization.
6985
6986 @cindex PowerPC64 OPD spacing
6987 @kindex --non-overlapping-opd
6988 @item --non-overlapping-opd
6989 Some PowerPC64 compilers have an option to generate compressed
6990 @code{.opd} entries spaced 16 bytes apart, overlapping the third word,
6991 the static chain pointer (unused in C) with the first word of the next
6992 entry. This option expands such entries to the full 24 bytes.
6993
6994 @cindex PowerPC64 TOC optimization
6995 @kindex --no-toc-optimize
6996 @item --no-toc-optimize
6997 PowerPC64 @command{ld} normally removes unused @code{.toc} section
6998 entries. Such entries are detected by examining relocations that
6999 reference the TOC in code sections. A reloc in a deleted code section
7000 marks a TOC word as unneeded, while a reloc in a kept code section
7001 marks a TOC word as needed. Since the TOC may reference itself, TOC
7002 relocs are also examined. TOC words marked as both needed and
7003 unneeded will of course be kept. TOC words without any referencing
7004 reloc are assumed to be part of a multi-word entry, and are kept or
7005 discarded as per the nearest marked preceding word. This works
7006 reliably for compiler generated code, but may be incorrect if assembly
7007 code is used to insert TOC entries. Use this option to disable the
7008 optimization.
7009
7010 @cindex PowerPC64 multi-TOC
7011 @kindex --no-multi-toc
7012 @item --no-multi-toc
7013 If given any toc option besides @code{-mcmodel=medium} or
7014 @code{-mcmodel=large}, PowerPC64 GCC generates code for a TOC model
7015 where TOC
7016 entries are accessed with a 16-bit offset from r2. This limits the
7017 total TOC size to 64K. PowerPC64 @command{ld} extends this limit by
7018 grouping code sections such that each group uses less than 64K for its
7019 TOC entries, then inserts r2 adjusting stubs between inter-group
7020 calls. @command{ld} does not split apart input sections, so cannot
7021 help if a single input file has a @code{.toc} section that exceeds
7022 64K, most likely from linking multiple files with @command{ld -r}.
7023 Use this option to turn off this feature.
7024
7025 @cindex PowerPC64 TOC sorting
7026 @kindex --no-toc-sort
7027 @item --no-toc-sort
7028 By default, @command{ld} sorts TOC sections so that those whose file
7029 happens to have a section called @code{.init} or @code{.fini} are
7030 placed first, followed by TOC sections referenced by code generated
7031 with PowerPC64 gcc's @code{-mcmodel=small}, and lastly TOC sections
7032 referenced only by code generated with PowerPC64 gcc's
7033 @code{-mcmodel=medium} or @code{-mcmodel=large} options. Doing this
7034 results in better TOC grouping for multi-TOC. Use this option to turn
7035 off this feature.
7036
7037 @cindex PowerPC64 PLT stub alignment
7038 @kindex --plt-align
7039 @kindex --no-plt-align
7040 @item --plt-align
7041 @itemx --no-plt-align
7042 Use these options to control whether individual PLT call stubs are
7043 aligned to a 32-byte boundary, or to the specified power of two
7044 boundary when using @code{--plt-align=}. By default PLT call stubs
7045 are packed tightly.
7046
7047 @cindex PowerPC64 PLT call stub static chain
7048 @kindex --plt-static-chain
7049 @kindex --no-plt-static-chain
7050 @item --plt-static-chain
7051 @itemx --no-plt-static-chain
7052 Use these options to control whether PLT call stubs load the static
7053 chain pointer (r11). @code{ld} defaults to not loading the static
7054 chain since there is never any need to do so on a PLT call.
7055
7056 @cindex PowerPC64 PLT call stub thread safety
7057 @kindex --plt-thread-safe
7058 @kindex --no-plt-thread-safe
7059 @item --plt-thread-safe
7060 @itemx --no-thread-safe
7061 With power7's weakly ordered memory model, it is possible when using
7062 lazy binding for ld.so to update a plt entry in one thread and have
7063 another thread see the individual plt entry words update in the wrong
7064 order, despite ld.so carefully writing in the correct order and using
7065 memory write barriers. To avoid this we need some sort of read
7066 barrier in the call stub, or use LD_BIND_NOW=1. By default, @code{ld}
7067 looks for calls to commonly used functions that create threads, and if
7068 seen, adds the necessary barriers. Use these options to change the
7069 default behaviour.
7070 @end table
7071
7072 @ifclear GENERIC
7073 @lowersections
7074 @end ifclear
7075 @end ifset
7076
7077 @ifset SPU
7078 @ifclear GENERIC
7079 @raisesections
7080 @end ifclear
7081
7082 @node SPU ELF
7083 @section @command{ld} and SPU ELF Support
7084
7085 @cindex SPU ELF options
7086 @table @option
7087
7088 @cindex SPU plugins
7089 @kindex --plugin
7090 @item --plugin
7091 This option marks an executable as a PIC plugin module.
7092
7093 @cindex SPU overlays
7094 @kindex --no-overlays
7095 @item --no-overlays
7096 Normally, @command{ld} recognizes calls to functions within overlay
7097 regions, and redirects such calls to an overlay manager via a stub.
7098 @command{ld} also provides a built-in overlay manager. This option
7099 turns off all this special overlay handling.
7100
7101 @cindex SPU overlay stub symbols
7102 @kindex --emit-stub-syms
7103 @item --emit-stub-syms
7104 This option causes @command{ld} to label overlay stubs with a local
7105 symbol that encodes the stub type and destination.
7106
7107 @cindex SPU extra overlay stubs
7108 @kindex --extra-overlay-stubs
7109 @item --extra-overlay-stubs
7110 This option causes @command{ld} to add overlay call stubs on all
7111 function calls out of overlay regions. Normally stubs are not added
7112 on calls to non-overlay regions.
7113
7114 @cindex SPU local store size
7115 @kindex --local-store=lo:hi
7116 @item --local-store=lo:hi
7117 @command{ld} usually checks that a final executable for SPU fits in
7118 the address range 0 to 256k. This option may be used to change the
7119 range. Disable the check entirely with @option{--local-store=0:0}.
7120
7121 @cindex SPU
7122 @kindex --stack-analysis
7123 @item --stack-analysis
7124 SPU local store space is limited. Over-allocation of stack space
7125 unnecessarily limits space available for code and data, while
7126 under-allocation results in runtime failures. If given this option,
7127 @command{ld} will provide an estimate of maximum stack usage.
7128 @command{ld} does this by examining symbols in code sections to
7129 determine the extents of functions, and looking at function prologues
7130 for stack adjusting instructions. A call-graph is created by looking
7131 for relocations on branch instructions. The graph is then searched
7132 for the maximum stack usage path. Note that this analysis does not
7133 find calls made via function pointers, and does not handle recursion
7134 and other cycles in the call graph. Stack usage may be
7135 under-estimated if your code makes such calls. Also, stack usage for
7136 dynamic allocation, e.g. alloca, will not be detected. If a link map
7137 is requested, detailed information about each function's stack usage
7138 and calls will be given.
7139
7140 @cindex SPU
7141 @kindex --emit-stack-syms
7142 @item --emit-stack-syms
7143 This option, if given along with @option{--stack-analysis} will result
7144 in @command{ld} emitting stack sizing symbols for each function.
7145 These take the form @code{__stack_<function_name>} for global
7146 functions, and @code{__stack_<number>_<function_name>} for static
7147 functions. @code{<number>} is the section id in hex. The value of
7148 such symbols is the stack requirement for the corresponding function.
7149 The symbol size will be zero, type @code{STT_NOTYPE}, binding
7150 @code{STB_LOCAL}, and section @code{SHN_ABS}.
7151 @end table
7152
7153 @ifclear GENERIC
7154 @lowersections
7155 @end ifclear
7156 @end ifset
7157
7158 @ifset TICOFF
7159 @ifclear GENERIC
7160 @raisesections
7161 @end ifclear
7162
7163 @node TI COFF
7164 @section @command{ld}'s Support for Various TI COFF Versions
7165 @cindex TI COFF versions
7166 @kindex --format=@var{version}
7167 The @samp{--format} switch allows selection of one of the various
7168 TI COFF versions. The latest of this writing is 2; versions 0 and 1 are
7169 also supported. The TI COFF versions also vary in header byte-order
7170 format; @command{ld} will read any version or byte order, but the output
7171 header format depends on the default specified by the specific target.
7172
7173 @ifclear GENERIC
7174 @lowersections
7175 @end ifclear
7176 @end ifset
7177
7178 @ifset WIN32
7179 @ifclear GENERIC
7180 @raisesections
7181 @end ifclear
7182
7183 @node WIN32
7184 @section @command{ld} and WIN32 (cygwin/mingw)
7185
7186 This section describes some of the win32 specific @command{ld} issues.
7187 See @ref{Options,,Command Line Options} for detailed description of the
7188 command line options mentioned here.
7189
7190 @table @emph
7191 @cindex import libraries
7192 @item import libraries
7193 The standard Windows linker creates and uses so-called import
7194 libraries, which contains information for linking to dll's. They are
7195 regular static archives and are handled as any other static
7196 archive. The cygwin and mingw ports of @command{ld} have specific
7197 support for creating such libraries provided with the
7198 @samp{--out-implib} command line option.
7199
7200 @item exporting DLL symbols
7201 @cindex exporting DLL symbols
7202 The cygwin/mingw @command{ld} has several ways to export symbols for dll's.
7203
7204 @table @emph
7205 @item using auto-export functionality
7206 @cindex using auto-export functionality
7207 By default @command{ld} exports symbols with the auto-export functionality,
7208 which is controlled by the following command line options:
7209
7210 @itemize
7211 @item --export-all-symbols [This is the default]
7212 @item --exclude-symbols
7213 @item --exclude-libs
7214 @item --exclude-modules-for-implib
7215 @item --version-script
7216 @end itemize
7217
7218 When auto-export is in operation, @command{ld} will export all the non-local
7219 (global and common) symbols it finds in a DLL, with the exception of a few
7220 symbols known to belong to the system's runtime and libraries. As it will
7221 often not be desirable to export all of a DLL's symbols, which may include
7222 private functions that are not part of any public interface, the command-line
7223 options listed above may be used to filter symbols out from the list for
7224 exporting. The @samp{--output-def} option can be used in order to see the
7225 final list of exported symbols with all exclusions taken into effect.
7226
7227 If @samp{--export-all-symbols} is not given explicitly on the
7228 command line, then the default auto-export behavior will be @emph{disabled}
7229 if either of the following are true:
7230
7231 @itemize
7232 @item A DEF file is used.
7233 @item Any symbol in any object file was marked with the __declspec(dllexport) attribute.
7234 @end itemize
7235
7236 @item using a DEF file
7237 @cindex using a DEF file
7238 Another way of exporting symbols is using a DEF file. A DEF file is
7239 an ASCII file containing definitions of symbols which should be
7240 exported when a dll is created. Usually it is named @samp{<dll
7241 name>.def} and is added as any other object file to the linker's
7242 command line. The file's name must end in @samp{.def} or @samp{.DEF}.
7243
7244 @example
7245 gcc -o <output> <objectfiles> <dll name>.def
7246 @end example
7247
7248 Using a DEF file turns off the normal auto-export behavior, unless the
7249 @samp{--export-all-symbols} option is also used.
7250
7251 Here is an example of a DEF file for a shared library called @samp{xyz.dll}:
7252
7253 @example
7254 LIBRARY "xyz.dll" BASE=0x20000000
7255
7256 EXPORTS
7257 foo
7258 bar
7259 _bar = bar
7260 another_foo = abc.dll.afoo
7261 var1 DATA
7262 doo = foo == foo2
7263 eoo DATA == var1
7264 @end example
7265
7266 This example defines a DLL with a non-default base address and seven
7267 symbols in the export table. The third exported symbol @code{_bar} is an
7268 alias for the second. The fourth symbol, @code{another_foo} is resolved
7269 by "forwarding" to another module and treating it as an alias for
7270 @code{afoo} exported from the DLL @samp{abc.dll}. The final symbol
7271 @code{var1} is declared to be a data object. The @samp{doo} symbol in
7272 export library is an alias of @samp{foo}, which gets the string name
7273 in export table @samp{foo2}. The @samp{eoo} symbol is an data export
7274 symbol, which gets in export table the name @samp{var1}.
7275
7276 The optional @code{LIBRARY <name>} command indicates the @emph{internal}
7277 name of the output DLL. If @samp{<name>} does not include a suffix,
7278 the default library suffix, @samp{.DLL} is appended.
7279
7280 When the .DEF file is used to build an application, rather than a
7281 library, the @code{NAME <name>} command should be used instead of
7282 @code{LIBRARY}. If @samp{<name>} does not include a suffix, the default
7283 executable suffix, @samp{.EXE} is appended.
7284
7285 With either @code{LIBRARY <name>} or @code{NAME <name>} the optional
7286 specification @code{BASE = <number>} may be used to specify a
7287 non-default base address for the image.
7288
7289 If neither @code{LIBRARY <name>} nor @code{NAME <name>} is specified,
7290 or they specify an empty string, the internal name is the same as the
7291 filename specified on the command line.
7292
7293 The complete specification of an export symbol is:
7294
7295 @example
7296 EXPORTS
7297 ( ( ( <name1> [ = <name2> ] )
7298 | ( <name1> = <module-name> . <external-name>))
7299 [ @@ <integer> ] [NONAME] [DATA] [CONSTANT] [PRIVATE] [== <name3>] ) *
7300 @end example
7301
7302 Declares @samp{<name1>} as an exported symbol from the DLL, or declares
7303 @samp{<name1>} as an exported alias for @samp{<name2>}; or declares
7304 @samp{<name1>} as a "forward" alias for the symbol
7305 @samp{<external-name>} in the DLL @samp{<module-name>}.
7306 Optionally, the symbol may be exported by the specified ordinal
7307 @samp{<integer>} alias. The optional @samp{<name3>} is the to be used
7308 string in import/export table for the symbol.
7309
7310 The optional keywords that follow the declaration indicate:
7311
7312 @code{NONAME}: Do not put the symbol name in the DLL's export table. It
7313 will still be exported by its ordinal alias (either the value specified
7314 by the .def specification or, otherwise, the value assigned by the
7315 linker). The symbol name, however, does remain visible in the import
7316 library (if any), unless @code{PRIVATE} is also specified.
7317
7318 @code{DATA}: The symbol is a variable or object, rather than a function.
7319 The import lib will export only an indirect reference to @code{foo} as
7320 the symbol @code{_imp__foo} (ie, @code{foo} must be resolved as
7321 @code{*_imp__foo}).
7322
7323 @code{CONSTANT}: Like @code{DATA}, but put the undecorated @code{foo} as
7324 well as @code{_imp__foo} into the import library. Both refer to the
7325 read-only import address table's pointer to the variable, not to the
7326 variable itself. This can be dangerous. If the user code fails to add
7327 the @code{dllimport} attribute and also fails to explicitly add the
7328 extra indirection that the use of the attribute enforces, the
7329 application will behave unexpectedly.
7330
7331 @code{PRIVATE}: Put the symbol in the DLL's export table, but do not put
7332 it into the static import library used to resolve imports at link time. The
7333 symbol can still be imported using the @code{LoadLibrary/GetProcAddress}
7334 API at runtime or by by using the GNU ld extension of linking directly to
7335 the DLL without an import library.
7336
7337 See ld/deffilep.y in the binutils sources for the full specification of
7338 other DEF file statements
7339
7340 @cindex creating a DEF file
7341 While linking a shared dll, @command{ld} is able to create a DEF file
7342 with the @samp{--output-def <file>} command line option.
7343
7344 @item Using decorations
7345 @cindex Using decorations
7346 Another way of marking symbols for export is to modify the source code
7347 itself, so that when building the DLL each symbol to be exported is
7348 declared as:
7349
7350 @example
7351 __declspec(dllexport) int a_variable
7352 __declspec(dllexport) void a_function(int with_args)
7353 @end example
7354
7355 All such symbols will be exported from the DLL. If, however,
7356 any of the object files in the DLL contain symbols decorated in
7357 this way, then the normal auto-export behavior is disabled, unless
7358 the @samp{--export-all-symbols} option is also used.
7359
7360 Note that object files that wish to access these symbols must @emph{not}
7361 decorate them with dllexport. Instead, they should use dllimport,
7362 instead:
7363
7364 @example
7365 __declspec(dllimport) int a_variable
7366 __declspec(dllimport) void a_function(int with_args)
7367 @end example
7368
7369 This complicates the structure of library header files, because
7370 when included by the library itself the header must declare the
7371 variables and functions as dllexport, but when included by client
7372 code the header must declare them as dllimport. There are a number
7373 of idioms that are typically used to do this; often client code can
7374 omit the __declspec() declaration completely. See
7375 @samp{--enable-auto-import} and @samp{automatic data imports} for more
7376 information.
7377 @end table
7378
7379 @cindex automatic data imports
7380 @item automatic data imports
7381 The standard Windows dll format supports data imports from dlls only
7382 by adding special decorations (dllimport/dllexport), which let the
7383 compiler produce specific assembler instructions to deal with this
7384 issue. This increases the effort necessary to port existing Un*x
7385 code to these platforms, especially for large
7386 c++ libraries and applications. The auto-import feature, which was
7387 initially provided by Paul Sokolovsky, allows one to omit the
7388 decorations to achieve a behavior that conforms to that on POSIX/Un*x
7389 platforms. This feature is enabled with the @samp{--enable-auto-import}
7390 command-line option, although it is enabled by default on cygwin/mingw.
7391 The @samp{--enable-auto-import} option itself now serves mainly to
7392 suppress any warnings that are ordinarily emitted when linked objects
7393 trigger the feature's use.
7394
7395 auto-import of variables does not always work flawlessly without
7396 additional assistance. Sometimes, you will see this message
7397
7398 "variable '<var>' can't be auto-imported. Please read the
7399 documentation for ld's @code{--enable-auto-import} for details."
7400
7401 The @samp{--enable-auto-import} documentation explains why this error
7402 occurs, and several methods that can be used to overcome this difficulty.
7403 One of these methods is the @emph{runtime pseudo-relocs} feature, described
7404 below.
7405
7406 @cindex runtime pseudo-relocation
7407 For complex variables imported from DLLs (such as structs or classes),
7408 object files typically contain a base address for the variable and an
7409 offset (@emph{addend}) within the variable--to specify a particular
7410 field or public member, for instance. Unfortunately, the runtime loader used
7411 in win32 environments is incapable of fixing these references at runtime
7412 without the additional information supplied by dllimport/dllexport decorations.
7413 The standard auto-import feature described above is unable to resolve these
7414 references.
7415
7416 The @samp{--enable-runtime-pseudo-relocs} switch allows these references to
7417 be resolved without error, while leaving the task of adjusting the references
7418 themselves (with their non-zero addends) to specialized code provided by the
7419 runtime environment. Recent versions of the cygwin and mingw environments and
7420 compilers provide this runtime support; older versions do not. However, the
7421 support is only necessary on the developer's platform; the compiled result will
7422 run without error on an older system.
7423
7424 @samp{--enable-runtime-pseudo-relocs} is not the default; it must be explicitly
7425 enabled as needed.
7426
7427 @cindex direct linking to a dll
7428 @item direct linking to a dll
7429 The cygwin/mingw ports of @command{ld} support the direct linking,
7430 including data symbols, to a dll without the usage of any import
7431 libraries. This is much faster and uses much less memory than does the
7432 traditional import library method, especially when linking large
7433 libraries or applications. When @command{ld} creates an import lib, each
7434 function or variable exported from the dll is stored in its own bfd, even
7435 though a single bfd could contain many exports. The overhead involved in
7436 storing, loading, and processing so many bfd's is quite large, and explains the
7437 tremendous time, memory, and storage needed to link against particularly
7438 large or complex libraries when using import libs.
7439
7440 Linking directly to a dll uses no extra command-line switches other than
7441 @samp{-L} and @samp{-l}, because @command{ld} already searches for a number
7442 of names to match each library. All that is needed from the developer's
7443 perspective is an understanding of this search, in order to force ld to
7444 select the dll instead of an import library.
7445
7446
7447 For instance, when ld is called with the argument @samp{-lxxx} it will attempt
7448 to find, in the first directory of its search path,
7449
7450 @example
7451 libxxx.dll.a
7452 xxx.dll.a
7453 libxxx.a
7454 xxx.lib
7455 cygxxx.dll (*)
7456 libxxx.dll
7457 xxx.dll
7458 @end example
7459
7460 before moving on to the next directory in the search path.
7461
7462 (*) Actually, this is not @samp{cygxxx.dll} but in fact is @samp{<prefix>xxx.dll},
7463 where @samp{<prefix>} is set by the @command{ld} option
7464 @samp{--dll-search-prefix=<prefix>}. In the case of cygwin, the standard gcc spec
7465 file includes @samp{--dll-search-prefix=cyg}, so in effect we actually search for
7466 @samp{cygxxx.dll}.
7467
7468 Other win32-based unix environments, such as mingw or pw32, may use other
7469 @samp{<prefix>}es, although at present only cygwin makes use of this feature. It
7470 was originally intended to help avoid name conflicts among dll's built for the
7471 various win32/un*x environments, so that (for example) two versions of a zlib dll
7472 could coexist on the same machine.
7473
7474 The generic cygwin/mingw path layout uses a @samp{bin} directory for
7475 applications and dll's and a @samp{lib} directory for the import
7476 libraries (using cygwin nomenclature):
7477
7478 @example
7479 bin/
7480 cygxxx.dll
7481 lib/
7482 libxxx.dll.a (in case of dll's)
7483 libxxx.a (in case of static archive)
7484 @end example
7485
7486 Linking directly to a dll without using the import library can be
7487 done two ways:
7488
7489 1. Use the dll directly by adding the @samp{bin} path to the link line
7490 @example
7491 gcc -Wl,-verbose -o a.exe -L../bin/ -lxxx
7492 @end example
7493
7494 However, as the dll's often have version numbers appended to their names
7495 (@samp{cygncurses-5.dll}) this will often fail, unless one specifies
7496 @samp{-L../bin -lncurses-5} to include the version. Import libs are generally
7497 not versioned, and do not have this difficulty.
7498
7499 2. Create a symbolic link from the dll to a file in the @samp{lib}
7500 directory according to the above mentioned search pattern. This
7501 should be used to avoid unwanted changes in the tools needed for
7502 making the app/dll.
7503
7504 @example
7505 ln -s bin/cygxxx.dll lib/[cyg|lib|]xxx.dll[.a]
7506 @end example
7507
7508 Then you can link without any make environment changes.
7509
7510 @example
7511 gcc -Wl,-verbose -o a.exe -L../lib/ -lxxx
7512 @end example
7513
7514 This technique also avoids the version number problems, because the following is
7515 perfectly legal
7516
7517 @example
7518 bin/
7519 cygxxx-5.dll
7520 lib/
7521 libxxx.dll.a -> ../bin/cygxxx-5.dll
7522 @end example
7523
7524 Linking directly to a dll without using an import lib will work
7525 even when auto-import features are exercised, and even when
7526 @samp{--enable-runtime-pseudo-relocs} is used.
7527
7528 Given the improvements in speed and memory usage, one might justifiably
7529 wonder why import libraries are used at all. There are three reasons:
7530
7531 1. Until recently, the link-directly-to-dll functionality did @emph{not}
7532 work with auto-imported data.
7533
7534 2. Sometimes it is necessary to include pure static objects within the
7535 import library (which otherwise contains only bfd's for indirection
7536 symbols that point to the exports of a dll). Again, the import lib
7537 for the cygwin kernel makes use of this ability, and it is not
7538 possible to do this without an import lib.
7539
7540 3. Symbol aliases can only be resolved using an import lib. This is
7541 critical when linking against OS-supplied dll's (eg, the win32 API)
7542 in which symbols are usually exported as undecorated aliases of their
7543 stdcall-decorated assembly names.
7544
7545 So, import libs are not going away. But the ability to replace
7546 true import libs with a simple symbolic link to (or a copy of)
7547 a dll, in many cases, is a useful addition to the suite of tools
7548 binutils makes available to the win32 developer. Given the
7549 massive improvements in memory requirements during linking, storage
7550 requirements, and linking speed, we expect that many developers
7551 will soon begin to use this feature whenever possible.
7552
7553 @item symbol aliasing
7554 @table @emph
7555 @item adding additional names
7556 Sometimes, it is useful to export symbols with additional names.
7557 A symbol @samp{foo} will be exported as @samp{foo}, but it can also be
7558 exported as @samp{_foo} by using special directives in the DEF file
7559 when creating the dll. This will affect also the optional created
7560 import library. Consider the following DEF file:
7561
7562 @example
7563 LIBRARY "xyz.dll" BASE=0x61000000
7564
7565 EXPORTS
7566 foo
7567 _foo = foo
7568 @end example
7569
7570 The line @samp{_foo = foo} maps the symbol @samp{foo} to @samp{_foo}.
7571
7572 Another method for creating a symbol alias is to create it in the
7573 source code using the "weak" attribute:
7574
7575 @example
7576 void foo () @{ /* Do something. */; @}
7577 void _foo () __attribute__ ((weak, alias ("foo")));
7578 @end example
7579
7580 See the gcc manual for more information about attributes and weak
7581 symbols.
7582
7583 @item renaming symbols
7584 Sometimes it is useful to rename exports. For instance, the cygwin
7585 kernel does this regularly. A symbol @samp{_foo} can be exported as
7586 @samp{foo} but not as @samp{_foo} by using special directives in the
7587 DEF file. (This will also affect the import library, if it is
7588 created). In the following example:
7589
7590 @example
7591 LIBRARY "xyz.dll" BASE=0x61000000
7592
7593 EXPORTS
7594 _foo = foo
7595 @end example
7596
7597 The line @samp{_foo = foo} maps the exported symbol @samp{foo} to
7598 @samp{_foo}.
7599 @end table
7600
7601 Note: using a DEF file disables the default auto-export behavior,
7602 unless the @samp{--export-all-symbols} command line option is used.
7603 If, however, you are trying to rename symbols, then you should list
7604 @emph{all} desired exports in the DEF file, including the symbols
7605 that are not being renamed, and do @emph{not} use the
7606 @samp{--export-all-symbols} option. If you list only the
7607 renamed symbols in the DEF file, and use @samp{--export-all-symbols}
7608 to handle the other symbols, then the both the new names @emph{and}
7609 the original names for the renamed symbols will be exported.
7610 In effect, you'd be aliasing those symbols, not renaming them,
7611 which is probably not what you wanted.
7612
7613 @cindex weak externals
7614 @item weak externals
7615 The Windows object format, PE, specifies a form of weak symbols called
7616 weak externals. When a weak symbol is linked and the symbol is not
7617 defined, the weak symbol becomes an alias for some other symbol. There
7618 are three variants of weak externals:
7619 @itemize
7620 @item Definition is searched for in objects and libraries, historically
7621 called lazy externals.
7622 @item Definition is searched for only in other objects, not in libraries.
7623 This form is not presently implemented.
7624 @item No search; the symbol is an alias. This form is not presently
7625 implemented.
7626 @end itemize
7627 As a GNU extension, weak symbols that do not specify an alternate symbol
7628 are supported. If the symbol is undefined when linking, the symbol
7629 uses a default value.
7630
7631 @cindex aligned common symbols
7632 @item aligned common symbols
7633 As a GNU extension to the PE file format, it is possible to specify the
7634 desired alignment for a common symbol. This information is conveyed from
7635 the assembler or compiler to the linker by means of GNU-specific commands
7636 carried in the object file's @samp{.drectve} section, which are recognized
7637 by @command{ld} and respected when laying out the common symbols. Native
7638 tools will be able to process object files employing this GNU extension,
7639 but will fail to respect the alignment instructions, and may issue noisy
7640 warnings about unknown linker directives.
7641
7642 @end table
7643
7644 @ifclear GENERIC
7645 @lowersections
7646 @end ifclear
7647 @end ifset
7648
7649 @ifset XTENSA
7650 @ifclear GENERIC
7651 @raisesections
7652 @end ifclear
7653
7654 @node Xtensa
7655 @section @code{ld} and Xtensa Processors
7656
7657 @cindex Xtensa processors
7658 The default @command{ld} behavior for Xtensa processors is to interpret
7659 @code{SECTIONS} commands so that lists of explicitly named sections in a
7660 specification with a wildcard file will be interleaved when necessary to
7661 keep literal pools within the range of PC-relative load offsets. For
7662 example, with the command:
7663
7664 @smallexample
7665 SECTIONS
7666 @{
7667 .text : @{
7668 *(.literal .text)
7669 @}
7670 @}
7671 @end smallexample
7672
7673 @noindent
7674 @command{ld} may interleave some of the @code{.literal}
7675 and @code{.text} sections from different object files to ensure that the
7676 literal pools are within the range of PC-relative load offsets. A valid
7677 interleaving might place the @code{.literal} sections from an initial
7678 group of files followed by the @code{.text} sections of that group of
7679 files. Then, the @code{.literal} sections from the rest of the files
7680 and the @code{.text} sections from the rest of the files would follow.
7681
7682 @cindex @option{--relax} on Xtensa
7683 @cindex relaxing on Xtensa
7684 Relaxation is enabled by default for the Xtensa version of @command{ld} and
7685 provides two important link-time optimizations. The first optimization
7686 is to combine identical literal values to reduce code size. A redundant
7687 literal will be removed and all the @code{L32R} instructions that use it
7688 will be changed to reference an identical literal, as long as the
7689 location of the replacement literal is within the offset range of all
7690 the @code{L32R} instructions. The second optimization is to remove
7691 unnecessary overhead from assembler-generated ``longcall'' sequences of
7692 @code{L32R}/@code{CALLX@var{n}} when the target functions are within
7693 range of direct @code{CALL@var{n}} instructions.
7694
7695 For each of these cases where an indirect call sequence can be optimized
7696 to a direct call, the linker will change the @code{CALLX@var{n}}
7697 instruction to a @code{CALL@var{n}} instruction, remove the @code{L32R}
7698 instruction, and remove the literal referenced by the @code{L32R}
7699 instruction if it is not used for anything else. Removing the
7700 @code{L32R} instruction always reduces code size but can potentially
7701 hurt performance by changing the alignment of subsequent branch targets.
7702 By default, the linker will always preserve alignments, either by
7703 switching some instructions between 24-bit encodings and the equivalent
7704 density instructions or by inserting a no-op in place of the @code{L32R}
7705 instruction that was removed. If code size is more important than
7706 performance, the @option{--size-opt} option can be used to prevent the
7707 linker from widening density instructions or inserting no-ops, except in
7708 a few cases where no-ops are required for correctness.
7709
7710 The following Xtensa-specific command-line options can be used to
7711 control the linker:
7712
7713 @cindex Xtensa options
7714 @table @option
7715 @item --size-opt
7716 When optimizing indirect calls to direct calls, optimize for code size
7717 more than performance. With this option, the linker will not insert
7718 no-ops or widen density instructions to preserve branch target
7719 alignment. There may still be some cases where no-ops are required to
7720 preserve the correctness of the code.
7721 @end table
7722
7723 @ifclear GENERIC
7724 @lowersections
7725 @end ifclear
7726 @end ifset
7727
7728 @ifclear SingleFormat
7729 @node BFD
7730 @chapter BFD
7731
7732 @cindex back end
7733 @cindex object file management
7734 @cindex object formats available
7735 @kindex objdump -i
7736 The linker accesses object and archive files using the BFD libraries.
7737 These libraries allow the linker to use the same routines to operate on
7738 object files whatever the object file format. A different object file
7739 format can be supported simply by creating a new BFD back end and adding
7740 it to the library. To conserve runtime memory, however, the linker and
7741 associated tools are usually configured to support only a subset of the
7742 object file formats available. You can use @code{objdump -i}
7743 (@pxref{objdump,,objdump,binutils.info,The GNU Binary Utilities}) to
7744 list all the formats available for your configuration.
7745
7746 @cindex BFD requirements
7747 @cindex requirements for BFD
7748 As with most implementations, BFD is a compromise between
7749 several conflicting requirements. The major factor influencing
7750 BFD design was efficiency: any time used converting between
7751 formats is time which would not have been spent had BFD not
7752 been involved. This is partly offset by abstraction payback; since
7753 BFD simplifies applications and back ends, more time and care
7754 may be spent optimizing algorithms for a greater speed.
7755
7756 One minor artifact of the BFD solution which you should bear in
7757 mind is the potential for information loss. There are two places where
7758 useful information can be lost using the BFD mechanism: during
7759 conversion and during output. @xref{BFD information loss}.
7760
7761 @menu
7762 * BFD outline:: How it works: an outline of BFD
7763 @end menu
7764
7765 @node BFD outline
7766 @section How It Works: An Outline of BFD
7767 @cindex opening object files
7768 @include bfdsumm.texi
7769 @end ifclear
7770
7771 @node Reporting Bugs
7772 @chapter Reporting Bugs
7773 @cindex bugs in @command{ld}
7774 @cindex reporting bugs in @command{ld}
7775
7776 Your bug reports play an essential role in making @command{ld} reliable.
7777
7778 Reporting a bug may help you by bringing a solution to your problem, or
7779 it may not. But in any case the principal function of a bug report is
7780 to help the entire community by making the next version of @command{ld}
7781 work better. Bug reports are your contribution to the maintenance of
7782 @command{ld}.
7783
7784 In order for a bug report to serve its purpose, you must include the
7785 information that enables us to fix the bug.
7786
7787 @menu
7788 * Bug Criteria:: Have you found a bug?
7789 * Bug Reporting:: How to report bugs
7790 @end menu
7791
7792 @node Bug Criteria
7793 @section Have You Found a Bug?
7794 @cindex bug criteria
7795
7796 If you are not sure whether you have found a bug, here are some guidelines:
7797
7798 @itemize @bullet
7799 @cindex fatal signal
7800 @cindex linker crash
7801 @cindex crash of linker
7802 @item
7803 If the linker gets a fatal signal, for any input whatever, that is a
7804 @command{ld} bug. Reliable linkers never crash.
7805
7806 @cindex error on valid input
7807 @item
7808 If @command{ld} produces an error message for valid input, that is a bug.
7809
7810 @cindex invalid input
7811 @item
7812 If @command{ld} does not produce an error message for invalid input, that
7813 may be a bug. In the general case, the linker can not verify that
7814 object files are correct.
7815
7816 @item
7817 If you are an experienced user of linkers, your suggestions for
7818 improvement of @command{ld} are welcome in any case.
7819 @end itemize
7820
7821 @node Bug Reporting
7822 @section How to Report Bugs
7823 @cindex bug reports
7824 @cindex @command{ld} bugs, reporting
7825
7826 A number of companies and individuals offer support for @sc{gnu}
7827 products. If you obtained @command{ld} from a support organization, we
7828 recommend you contact that organization first.
7829
7830 You can find contact information for many support companies and
7831 individuals in the file @file{etc/SERVICE} in the @sc{gnu} Emacs
7832 distribution.
7833
7834 @ifset BUGURL
7835 Otherwise, send bug reports for @command{ld} to
7836 @value{BUGURL}.
7837 @end ifset
7838
7839 The fundamental principle of reporting bugs usefully is this:
7840 @strong{report all the facts}. If you are not sure whether to state a
7841 fact or leave it out, state it!
7842
7843 Often people omit facts because they think they know what causes the
7844 problem and assume that some details do not matter. Thus, you might
7845 assume that the name of a symbol you use in an example does not
7846 matter. Well, probably it does not, but one cannot be sure. Perhaps
7847 the bug is a stray memory reference which happens to fetch from the
7848 location where that name is stored in memory; perhaps, if the name
7849 were different, the contents of that location would fool the linker
7850 into doing the right thing despite the bug. Play it safe and give a
7851 specific, complete example. That is the easiest thing for you to do,
7852 and the most helpful.
7853
7854 Keep in mind that the purpose of a bug report is to enable us to fix
7855 the bug if it is new to us. Therefore, always write your bug reports
7856 on the assumption that the bug has not been reported previously.
7857
7858 Sometimes people give a few sketchy facts and ask, ``Does this ring a
7859 bell?'' This cannot help us fix a bug, so it is basically useless. We
7860 respond by asking for enough details to enable us to investigate.
7861 You might as well expedite matters by sending them to begin with.
7862
7863 To enable us to fix the bug, you should include all these things:
7864
7865 @itemize @bullet
7866 @item
7867 The version of @command{ld}. @command{ld} announces it if you start it with
7868 the @samp{--version} argument.
7869
7870 Without this, we will not know whether there is any point in looking for
7871 the bug in the current version of @command{ld}.
7872
7873 @item
7874 Any patches you may have applied to the @command{ld} source, including any
7875 patches made to the @code{BFD} library.
7876
7877 @item
7878 The type of machine you are using, and the operating system name and
7879 version number.
7880
7881 @item
7882 What compiler (and its version) was used to compile @command{ld}---e.g.
7883 ``@code{gcc-2.7}''.
7884
7885 @item
7886 The command arguments you gave the linker to link your example and
7887 observe the bug. To guarantee you will not omit something important,
7888 list them all. A copy of the Makefile (or the output from make) is
7889 sufficient.
7890
7891 If we were to try to guess the arguments, we would probably guess wrong
7892 and then we might not encounter the bug.
7893
7894 @item
7895 A complete input file, or set of input files, that will reproduce the
7896 bug. It is generally most helpful to send the actual object files
7897 provided that they are reasonably small. Say no more than 10K. For
7898 bigger files you can either make them available by FTP or HTTP or else
7899 state that you are willing to send the object file(s) to whomever
7900 requests them. (Note - your email will be going to a mailing list, so
7901 we do not want to clog it up with large attachments). But small
7902 attachments are best.
7903
7904 If the source files were assembled using @code{gas} or compiled using
7905 @code{gcc}, then it may be OK to send the source files rather than the
7906 object files. In this case, be sure to say exactly what version of
7907 @code{gas} or @code{gcc} was used to produce the object files. Also say
7908 how @code{gas} or @code{gcc} were configured.
7909
7910 @item
7911 A description of what behavior you observe that you believe is
7912 incorrect. For example, ``It gets a fatal signal.''
7913
7914 Of course, if the bug is that @command{ld} gets a fatal signal, then we
7915 will certainly notice it. But if the bug is incorrect output, we might
7916 not notice unless it is glaringly wrong. You might as well not give us
7917 a chance to make a mistake.
7918
7919 Even if the problem you experience is a fatal signal, you should still
7920 say so explicitly. Suppose something strange is going on, such as, your
7921 copy of @command{ld} is out of sync, or you have encountered a bug in the
7922 C library on your system. (This has happened!) Your copy might crash
7923 and ours would not. If you told us to expect a crash, then when ours
7924 fails to crash, we would know that the bug was not happening for us. If
7925 you had not told us to expect a crash, then we would not be able to draw
7926 any conclusion from our observations.
7927
7928 @item
7929 If you wish to suggest changes to the @command{ld} source, send us context
7930 diffs, as generated by @code{diff} with the @samp{-u}, @samp{-c}, or
7931 @samp{-p} option. Always send diffs from the old file to the new file.
7932 If you even discuss something in the @command{ld} source, refer to it by
7933 context, not by line number.
7934
7935 The line numbers in our development sources will not match those in your
7936 sources. Your line numbers would convey no useful information to us.
7937 @end itemize
7938
7939 Here are some things that are not necessary:
7940
7941 @itemize @bullet
7942 @item
7943 A description of the envelope of the bug.
7944
7945 Often people who encounter a bug spend a lot of time investigating
7946 which changes to the input file will make the bug go away and which
7947 changes will not affect it.
7948
7949 This is often time consuming and not very useful, because the way we
7950 will find the bug is by running a single example under the debugger
7951 with breakpoints, not by pure deduction from a series of examples.
7952 We recommend that you save your time for something else.
7953
7954 Of course, if you can find a simpler example to report @emph{instead}
7955 of the original one, that is a convenience for us. Errors in the
7956 output will be easier to spot, running under the debugger will take
7957 less time, and so on.
7958
7959 However, simplification is not vital; if you do not want to do this,
7960 report the bug anyway and send us the entire test case you used.
7961
7962 @item
7963 A patch for the bug.
7964
7965 A patch for the bug does help us if it is a good one. But do not omit
7966 the necessary information, such as the test case, on the assumption that
7967 a patch is all we need. We might see problems with your patch and decide
7968 to fix the problem another way, or we might not understand it at all.
7969
7970 Sometimes with a program as complicated as @command{ld} it is very hard to
7971 construct an example that will make the program follow a certain path
7972 through the code. If you do not send us the example, we will not be
7973 able to construct one, so we will not be able to verify that the bug is
7974 fixed.
7975
7976 And if we cannot understand what bug you are trying to fix, or why your
7977 patch should be an improvement, we will not install it. A test case will
7978 help us to understand.
7979
7980 @item
7981 A guess about what the bug is or what it depends on.
7982
7983 Such guesses are usually wrong. Even we cannot guess right about such
7984 things without first using the debugger to find the facts.
7985 @end itemize
7986
7987 @node MRI
7988 @appendix MRI Compatible Script Files
7989 @cindex MRI compatibility
7990 To aid users making the transition to @sc{gnu} @command{ld} from the MRI
7991 linker, @command{ld} can use MRI compatible linker scripts as an
7992 alternative to the more general-purpose linker scripting language
7993 described in @ref{Scripts}. MRI compatible linker scripts have a much
7994 simpler command set than the scripting language otherwise used with
7995 @command{ld}. @sc{gnu} @command{ld} supports the most commonly used MRI
7996 linker commands; these commands are described here.
7997
7998 In general, MRI scripts aren't of much use with the @code{a.out} object
7999 file format, since it only has three sections and MRI scripts lack some
8000 features to make use of them.
8001
8002 You can specify a file containing an MRI-compatible script using the
8003 @samp{-c} command-line option.
8004
8005 Each command in an MRI-compatible script occupies its own line; each
8006 command line starts with the keyword that identifies the command (though
8007 blank lines are also allowed for punctuation). If a line of an
8008 MRI-compatible script begins with an unrecognized keyword, @command{ld}
8009 issues a warning message, but continues processing the script.
8010
8011 Lines beginning with @samp{*} are comments.
8012
8013 You can write these commands using all upper-case letters, or all
8014 lower case; for example, @samp{chip} is the same as @samp{CHIP}.
8015 The following list shows only the upper-case form of each command.
8016
8017 @table @code
8018 @cindex @code{ABSOLUTE} (MRI)
8019 @item ABSOLUTE @var{secname}
8020 @itemx ABSOLUTE @var{secname}, @var{secname}, @dots{} @var{secname}
8021 Normally, @command{ld} includes in the output file all sections from all
8022 the input files. However, in an MRI-compatible script, you can use the
8023 @code{ABSOLUTE} command to restrict the sections that will be present in
8024 your output program. If the @code{ABSOLUTE} command is used at all in a
8025 script, then only the sections named explicitly in @code{ABSOLUTE}
8026 commands will appear in the linker output. You can still use other
8027 input sections (whatever you select on the command line, or using
8028 @code{LOAD}) to resolve addresses in the output file.
8029
8030 @cindex @code{ALIAS} (MRI)
8031 @item ALIAS @var{out-secname}, @var{in-secname}
8032 Use this command to place the data from input section @var{in-secname}
8033 in a section called @var{out-secname} in the linker output file.
8034
8035 @var{in-secname} may be an integer.
8036
8037 @cindex @code{ALIGN} (MRI)
8038 @item ALIGN @var{secname} = @var{expression}
8039 Align the section called @var{secname} to @var{expression}. The
8040 @var{expression} should be a power of two.
8041
8042 @cindex @code{BASE} (MRI)
8043 @item BASE @var{expression}
8044 Use the value of @var{expression} as the lowest address (other than
8045 absolute addresses) in the output file.
8046
8047 @cindex @code{CHIP} (MRI)
8048 @item CHIP @var{expression}
8049 @itemx CHIP @var{expression}, @var{expression}
8050 This command does nothing; it is accepted only for compatibility.
8051
8052 @cindex @code{END} (MRI)
8053 @item END
8054 This command does nothing whatever; it's only accepted for compatibility.
8055
8056 @cindex @code{FORMAT} (MRI)
8057 @item FORMAT @var{output-format}
8058 Similar to the @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} command in the more general linker
8059 language, but restricted to one of these output formats:
8060
8061 @enumerate
8062 @item
8063 S-records, if @var{output-format} is @samp{S}
8064
8065 @item
8066 IEEE, if @var{output-format} is @samp{IEEE}
8067
8068 @item
8069 COFF (the @samp{coff-m68k} variant in BFD), if @var{output-format} is
8070 @samp{COFF}
8071 @end enumerate
8072
8073 @cindex @code{LIST} (MRI)
8074 @item LIST @var{anything}@dots{}
8075 Print (to the standard output file) a link map, as produced by the
8076 @command{ld} command-line option @samp{-M}.
8077
8078 The keyword @code{LIST} may be followed by anything on the
8079 same line, with no change in its effect.
8080
8081 @cindex @code{LOAD} (MRI)
8082 @item LOAD @var{filename}
8083 @itemx LOAD @var{filename}, @var{filename}, @dots{} @var{filename}
8084 Include one or more object file @var{filename} in the link; this has the
8085 same effect as specifying @var{filename} directly on the @command{ld}
8086 command line.
8087
8088 @cindex @code{NAME} (MRI)
8089 @item NAME @var{output-name}
8090 @var{output-name} is the name for the program produced by @command{ld}; the
8091 MRI-compatible command @code{NAME} is equivalent to the command-line
8092 option @samp{-o} or the general script language command @code{OUTPUT}.
8093
8094 @cindex @code{ORDER} (MRI)
8095 @item ORDER @var{secname}, @var{secname}, @dots{} @var{secname}
8096 @itemx ORDER @var{secname} @var{secname} @var{secname}
8097 Normally, @command{ld} orders the sections in its output file in the
8098 order in which they first appear in the input files. In an MRI-compatible
8099 script, you can override this ordering with the @code{ORDER} command. The
8100 sections you list with @code{ORDER} will appear first in your output
8101 file, in the order specified.
8102
8103 @cindex @code{PUBLIC} (MRI)
8104 @item PUBLIC @var{name}=@var{expression}
8105 @itemx PUBLIC @var{name},@var{expression}
8106 @itemx PUBLIC @var{name} @var{expression}
8107 Supply a value (@var{expression}) for external symbol
8108 @var{name} used in the linker input files.
8109
8110 @cindex @code{SECT} (MRI)
8111 @item SECT @var{secname}, @var{expression}
8112 @itemx SECT @var{secname}=@var{expression}
8113 @itemx SECT @var{secname} @var{expression}
8114 You can use any of these three forms of the @code{SECT} command to
8115 specify the start address (@var{expression}) for section @var{secname}.
8116 If you have more than one @code{SECT} statement for the same
8117 @var{secname}, only the @emph{first} sets the start address.
8118 @end table
8119
8120 @node GNU Free Documentation License
8121 @appendix GNU Free Documentation License
8122 @include fdl.texi
8123
8124 @node LD Index
8125 @unnumbered LD Index
8126
8127 @printindex cp
8128
8129 @tex
8130 % I think something like @@colophon should be in texinfo. In the
8131 % meantime:
8132 \long\def\colophon{\hbox to0pt{}\vfill
8133 \centerline{The body of this manual is set in}
8134 \centerline{\fontname\tenrm,}
8135 \centerline{with headings in {\bf\fontname\tenbf}}
8136 \centerline{and examples in {\tt\fontname\tentt}.}
8137 \centerline{{\it\fontname\tenit\/} and}
8138 \centerline{{\sl\fontname\tensl\/}}
8139 \centerline{are used for emphasis.}\vfill}
8140 \page\colophon
8141 % Blame: doc@@cygnus.com, 28mar91.
8142 @end tex
8143
8144 @bye